Cisco TelePresence MX800 Guide

Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.7
APRIL 2019
Administrator guide
for Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800
D15331.15 rev1 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
1
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Table of contents
Thank you for choosing Cisco!
Your Cisco product has been designed to give you many
years of safe, reliable operation.
Introduction........................................................................................................................ 4
User documentation and software........................................................................................ 5
What’s new in CE9................................................................................................................. 6
MX700 and MX800 at a glance........................................................................................... 32
Power On and Off................................................................................................................ 38
LED indicators...................................................................................................................... 39
How to administer the video system.................................................................................... 42
This part of the product documentation is aimed at
administrators working with the setup and configuration of
the video system.
Our main objective with this Administrator guide is to
address your goals and needs. Please let us know how
well we succeeded!
Configuration................................................................................................................... 46
User administration.............................................................................................................. 47
Change the system passphrase.......................................................................................... 48
Restrict the access to the Settings menu............................................................................ 49
System configuration........................................................................................................... 50
Add a sign in banner.............................................................................................................51
Add a welcome banner........................................................................................................ 52
Manage the service certificates of the video system.......................................................... 53
Manage the list of trusted certificate authorities (CAs)....................................................... 54
Set up secure audit logging................................................................................................. 55
Manage pre-installed certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning......................... 56
Delete CUCM trust lists....................................................................................................... 57
Change the persistency mode............................................................................................ 58
Set strong security mode.................................................................................................... 59
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing................................................................... 60
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio.............................................................................. 65
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface.................................. 67
Add a custom wallpaper...................................................................................................... 69
Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume................................................................. 70
Manage the Favorites list..................................................................................................... 71
Set up accessibility features................................................................................................ 72
May we recommend that you visit the Cisco web site
regularly for updated versions of this guide.
The user documentation can be found on
► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
How to use this guide
The top menu bar and the entries in the Table of contents
are all hyperlinks. You can click on them to go to the topic.
Peripherals....................................................................................................................... 73
Connect external monitors...................................................................................................74
Connect input sources......................................................................................................... 77
Extend the number of input sources.................................................................................... 79
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature......................................................................................... 80
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature............................................................................... 82
Set up the PresenterTrack feature....................................................................................... 85
Briefing room set-up............................................................................................................ 90
Classroom set-up................................................................................................................ 96
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
2
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Security settings................................................................................................................ 187
SerialPort settings.............................................................................................................. 190
SIP settings.........................................................................................................................191
Standby settings................................................................................................................ 195
SystemUnit settings........................................................................................................... 197
Time settings..................................................................................................................... 198
UserInterface settings........................................................................................................ 202
UserManagement settings................................................................................................. 207
Video settings.................................................................................................................... 209
Experimental settings.........................................................................................................219
Test the loudspeaker connections......................................................................................101
Using extra loudspeakers and sound reinforcement......................................................... 103
Connect the Touch 10 controller....................................................................................... 104
Connect the ISDN Link....................................................................................................... 108
Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 109
Upgrade the system software............................................................................................110
Add option keys..................................................................................................................112
System status.....................................................................................................................113
Run diagnostics...................................................................................................................114
Download log files...............................................................................................................115
Create a remote support user............................................................................................116
Backup and restore configurations and custom elements.................................................117
CUCM provisioning of custom elements............................................................................118
TMS provisioning of custom elements................................................................................119
Revert to the previously used software image.................................................................. 120
Factory reset the video system..........................................................................................121
Factory reset Cisco Touch 10.............................................................................................124
Factory reset Cisco TelePresence Touch 10..................................................................... 125
Capture user interface screenshots.................................................................................. 126
Appendices.................................................................................................................... 220
How to use Touch 10......................................................................................................... 221
Set up remote monitoring.................................................................................................. 222
Access call information and answer a call while using the web interface......................... 223
Place a call using the web interface.................................................................................. 224
Share content using the web interface.............................................................................. 226
Local layout control............................................................................................................ 227
Control a local camera....................................................................................................... 228
Control a far end camera................................................................................................... 229
Packet loss resilience - ClearPath..................................................................................... 230
Room analytics................................................................................................................... 231
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface.................................................... 232
Customize the video system's behavior using macros ..................................................... 234
Remove default buttons from the user interface............................................................... 235
Sending HTTP(S) Post and Put requests .......................................................................... 236
Input source composition.................................................................................................. 237
Presentation source composition...................................................................................... 239
Manage startup scripts.......................................................................................................241
Access the video system’s XML files ............................................................................... 242
Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface ............................... 243
Advanced customization of audio...................................................................................... 244
Notes regarding screen technology.................................................................................. 245
GPIO interface.................................................................................................................... 246
About Ethernet ports.......................................................................................................... 247
Serial interface................................................................................................................... 248
Open TCP Ports................................................................................................................. 249
HTTPFeedback address from TMS................................................................................... 250
Technical specification....................................................................................................... 251
Supported RFCs................................................................................................................ 255
User documentation on the Cisco web site....................................................................... 256
Cisco contacts................................................................................................................... 257
System settings............................................................................................................. 127
Overview of the system settings....................................................................................... 128
Audio settings.................................................................................................................... 134
CallHistory settings.............................................................................................................142
Cameras settings............................................................................................................... 143
Conference settings.......................................................................................................... 149
FacilityService settings...................................................................................................... 154
GPIO settings..................................................................................................................... 155
H323 settings..................................................................................................................... 156
HttpClient settings............................................................................................................. 159
Logging settings................................................................................................................ 160
Macros settings..................................................................................................................161
Network settings................................................................................................................ 162
NetworkServices settings...................................................................................................170
Peripherals settings........................................................................................................... 177
Phonebook settings............................................................................................................179
Provisioning settings.......................................................................................................... 180
Proximity settings.............................................................................................................. 183
RoomAnalytics settings..................................................................................................... 184
RoomReset settings........................................................................................................... 185
RTP settings....................................................................................................................... 186
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System settings
3
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 1
Introduction
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
4
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
User documentation and software
Products covered in this guide
•
Cisco TelePresence MX700 with single camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX700 with dual camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX800 Single with single camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX800 Single with dual camera
•
Cisco TelePresence MX800 Dual
User documentation
Software
This guide provides you with the information required to
administrate the video system.
Download software for the endpoint from the Cisco web
site:
The guide primarilly addresses capabilities and
configurations of on-premise registered video systems
(CUCM, VCS), but a sub-set of the capabilities and
configurations also applies to devices that are registered
to our cloud service (Cisco Webex).
Refer to the ► User documentation on the Cisco web site
appendix for more information about the guides for this
product.
Documentation on the Cisco web site
Visit the Cisco web site regularly for updated versions of
the guides:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
Documentation for cloud registered devices
► https://software.cisco.com/download/home
We recommend reading the Software release notes
(CE9):
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/
collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-mx-series/tsdproducts-support-series-home.html
Converting to CE software
Before upgrading from TC software to CE software,
it is important to consider the upgrade requirements;
otherwise upgrading to CE software can leave you
with a non-functional deployment that requires you to
downgrade.
Refer to the software release notes, and the
► Upgrade the system software chapter.
For more information about devices that are registered to
the Cisco Webex cloud service, visit:
► https://help.webex.com
Cisco Project Workplace
Explore the Cisco Project Workplace to find inspiration
and guidelines when preparing an office or meeting room
for video conferencing:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/projectworkplace
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
5
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
What’s new in CE9
This chapter provides an overview of the new and changed
system settings, and the new features and improvements in the
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9 (CE9) compared
to CE8.
The following products are new in CE9:
•
CE9.0 - Room Kit
•
CE9.1 - Codec Plus, and Room 55
•
CE9.2 - Room 70
•
CE9.4 - Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, and Room 55 Dual
•
CE9.6 - Room Kit Mini
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release
notes:
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaborationendpoints/telepresence-mx-series/tsd-products-support-serieshome.html
New features and improvements in CE9.7
Connect to xAPI over a WebSocket
Ambient noise reporting
(All products)
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70
You can now connect to the xAPI over WebSocket.
The communication channel over WebSocket is open
both ways until it is explicitly closed. This means that
the server can send data to the client as soon as the
new data is available, and there is no need for reauthentication for every request. This improves speed
significantly compared to HTTP.
G2, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini)
The Room series devices can be configured to report
the stationary ambient noise level in the room. The
reported value is an A-weighted decibel value (dBA),
which reflects the response of the human ear. Based
on reported noise, facility management or a building
manager can intervene to troubleshoot the issue.
Each message contains a complete JSON document
and nothing else. Many programming languages have
good library support for WebSocket and JSON-RPC.
All signal processing related to this feature is local and
the only data transmitted is the calculated noise level.
WebSocket is not enabled by default. Note that
WebSocket is tied to HTTP and HTTP or HTTPS must
be enabled before you can use WebSocket.
Support for multiple SRG-120DH/PTZ-12
cameras (Codec Plus)
For more information, see ► xAPI over WebSocket
guide.
You can now connect up to three SRG-120DH/PTZ12 cameras to a Codec Plus using an HDMI and an
Ethernet switch.
Graphical sound mixer available on Audio
Console
Other updates
(Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2, Room 70D G2, SX80)
The Audio Console now has a graphical sound
mixer. It has 8 user-definable parametric equalizer
settings. A setting consists of up to 6 sections, each
of which has its own filter type, gain, center/crossover
frequency and Q value. Each section is shown with
its own color and the effect of altering any of the
parameters immediately becomes visible in the graph.
•
1080p support for Room Kit Mini when it is used
as a USB camera. (Room Kit Mini)
•
You can turn video off and on during calls.
(All
products)
•
A system administrator can prevent the use of
HTTP and only allow HTTPS Post and HTTPS Put
requests. (All products)
For more information, see the Customization guide
for CE9.7 at ► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-roomcontrol-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
6
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.6
New product
•
Cisco Webex Room Kit Mini
HDCP support
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
The room device’s second HDMI input (Connector 3)
can be configured to support HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection) protected content. This allows
customers to re-purpose the screen by connecting
devices such as a Google Chromecast, an Apple TV, or
an HDTV decoder. This type of content cannot be shared
while in a call.
When the connector is configured to support HDCP, it
is reserved for this type of content. This means that you
cannot share any content from this specific connector
while in a call, not even non-protected content from a
laptop.
Remove default buttons from the user interface
(All products)
If you don’t need all of the default buttons on the user
interface, you can remove the ones that you don’t
need. This makes it possible to fully customize the user
interface. The configuration only removes the buttons, not
the functionality as such, and the custom In-Room Control
panels can still be exposed.
For more information, see the Customization guide at
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
HTTP Post and Put requests (All products)
Content priority (All products)
This feature makes it possible to send arbitrary HTTP(S)
Post and Put requests from a device to an HTTP(S)
server.
You can now configure your device to prioritize bandwidth
usage for either Main Video Channel or Presentation
Channel.
By using macros, you can send data to an HTTP(S) server
whenever you want. You can choose what data to send,
and structure them as you like. This way you can adapt
the data to an already established service.
xConfiguration Video Presentation Priority:
<Equal, High>
Security measures:
•
The HTTP(S) Post/Put feature is disabled by default.
•
The system administrator can specify a list of HTTP(S)
servers that the device is allowed to send data to.
•
The number of concurrent Post and Put requests is
limited.
Support for 3rd party USB controllers
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, DX70, DX80, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
You can use a 3rd party USB input device to control
certain functions on a room device. A Bluetooth remote
control with a USB dongle and a USB keyboard are
examples of such input devices. You can setup the
desired features through macros.
Equal is the default configuration and means 50 /
50 bandwidth division. Selecting “High” divides the
bandwidth 25 / 75 in favor of the presentation channel.
Other updates (All products)
•
You can start and control recording meetings from
the device’s user interface, provided that recording is
supported by your infrastructure.
•
Edit contact’s information on UIs.
•
SIP calls now display the SIP Session ID field in the
logs to help identify calls.
•
Ability to use ICE over MRA to locate the best path for
media.
This feature is meant to complement the functionality of
the Touch 10 or the DX user interfaces. It is not meant to
replace the Touch 10 and DX user interfaces.
For more information, see the Customization guide at
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
7
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.5
Presentation source composition
Audio Console on the web interface
Support for Korean keyboard (All products)
(All products except SX10, DX70, DX80)
(SX80, Codec Pro)
With using two or more content sources and sending
them as one image, you can create a new experience for
sharing in meetings.
The new Audio Console is natively available on the web
interface. The audio console gives you simplified tools to
route audio from an input to an output. The Audio Console
replaces the old java-based CE Console that is no longer
maintained.
Korean keyboard input is supported on Touch 10 when
the user interface language is set to Korean.
This gives users more flexibility with what they present
to remote sites. You can configure the presentation
composition through in-room controls together with
macros or an external controller.
The maximum number of different sources is determined
by the device in use:
•
SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, and Room Kit: two
sources
•
Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, and Room 70:
three sources
•
SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Pro, and Room 70 G2:
four sources
You can only compose content that has been shared
through a cable.
When you access the Audio Console for the first time
you will see the default system audio routes. The Audio
Console is controlled by an underlying macro, which is
saved and started once you select Choose to overwrite
the current device configurations.
For more information, see the Customization guide at
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Classroom set-up
(SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
Room 70 G2)
The Classroom template uses macros to tailor a room setup that works well for presenting and teaching scenarios.
The template provides easy setup, management, and use
of the room.
The Classroom set-up works similarly to the Briefing
Room set-up (which is available for SX80, Codec Pro,
MX700, MX800, and Room 70 G2), but it doesn’t require
three screens.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
8
Remote monitoring of screen status
(SX20, SX80)
The remote monitoring of screen status that has been
available for the Webex Room series and SX10, is now
available for SX20 and SX80.
The codec can wake up the screen from standby
mode, or put the screen to standby when the codec
enters standby. The input source can also be changed
automatically when a call is received.
CEC is disabled on the video system by default and
must be enabled in the Video Output Connector [n] CEC
Mode setting. Your screen must support CEC for remote
monitoring to work.
Welcome banner
(All products)
You can set up a welcome banner that users see after
they sign in to the video system's web interface or
command line interface. The banner can for example
contain information you need in order to get started, or
things you must be aware of when setting up the system.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.4
New products
•
Cisco Webex Codec Pro
•
Cisco Webex Room 55 Dual
•
Cisco Webex Room 70 G2
Rebranding from Cisco Spark to Cisco Webex
(All products)
Cisco Spark has changed its name to Cisco Webex, and
the user interface elements that displayed Spark are
changed to Webex. In the activation flow you now see
Cisco Webex as a registration option instead of Cisco
Spark.
The following products have gotten new names:
•
Cisco Spark Room Kit is now Cisco Webex Room Kit
•
Cisco Spark Room Kit Plus is now Cisco Webex
Room Kit Plus
•
Cisco Spark Codec Plus is now Cisco Webex
Codec Plus
•
Cisco Spark Quad Camera is now Cisco Quad Camera
•
Cisco Spark Room 55 are now Cisco Webex Room 55
•
Cisco Spark Room 70 are now Cisco Webex Room 70
•
Cisco DX70 is now Cisco Webex DX70
•
Cisco DX80 is now Cisco Webex DX80
The maximum number of Proximity clients is
increased
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
Room 70 G2)
A Cisco Webex Room Series device can have up to 30
paired clients simultaneously when the Proximity service
ContentShare ToClients is disabled. If ContentShare
ToClients is enabled, the limit of paired clients is 7 which
is the same as in earlier software versions.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Support for content sharing using H.263 in a
call between Cisco Webex Room Series and
legacy MXP devices
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
Room 70 G2)
Support for H.263 content sharing between MXP and
Cisco Webex Room Series is now available. The Room
Series previously had a limitation where it could not
receive or share content in a separate content channel.
Sharing content from a Room Series device to an MXP
device would in earlier versions compose the presentation
into the main video stream.
This is only supported in certain scenarios:
•
Direct H.323 calls (IP dialing) between a Room Series
device and an MXP device.
•
MXP registered on VCS on H.323 and a Room Series
device registered to the same VCS on either SIP
or H.323. Note that making an H.323 to SIP call on
a VCS requires that an interworking option key is
installed on the VCS.
See the CE9 release notes for information on other
limitations related to this feature.
CUCM provisioning of the admin settings
lockdown configuration (All products)
The admin settings lockdown configuration, that was
introduced in CE9.2.1, can now be provisioned from
CUCM. You can lock a selection of the settings on the
settings menu on all of your devices simultaneously when
you configure them through CUCM.
Your CUCM may require a new device package in order to
expose the new fields for this configuration.
9
Enable backlight compensation from the user
interface (DX70, DX80)
A new setting on the DX70 and DX80 main menu enables
and disables backlight compensation. This is a fixed
setting that increases (on) or decreases (off) the sensors
brightness levels in order to compensate for sunlight or
other bright light sources behind the user. The backlight
compensation sets the sensor to a fixed level and it is not
auto adjusted to the backlight.
Changed default HTTP mode from
HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS (All products)
The default value of NetworkServices HTTP Mode
is changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS. This is to
increase the security of the room devices on default
configuration. Upgrading from earlier software versions
will not automatically change the default value and it will
stay on HTTP+HTTPS to avoid breaking current HTTP
implementations.
The change is seen on new systems running CE9.4.0
or later, or if the device is factory reset on CE9.4.0. The
HTTP requests are redirect to HTTPS and on the first
visit to the device’s web interface, the device displays
an “Insecure connection warning”. To proceed to the
web interface, you need to create an exception in your
browser. This is a one-time operation unless you access
the web interface with a different browser that has never
visited the device web interface or if the device is factory
reset.
In-Room Control update
(All products)
You can add buttons for as many panels as you want on
the home screen as well as on the in-call screen of the
user interface.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.3
Backup and restore settings and custom
elements (All products)
You can include custom elements as well as
configurations in a backup file bundle (zip). You can
choose which of the following elements to include in the
bundle:
•
Branding images
•
Macros
•
Favorites
•
Sign-in banner
•
In-room control panels
•
Configurations (all or a sub-set)
In previous software versions, you could only backup the
configurations.
The backup file can either be restored manually from
the video system’s web interface, or you can generalize
the backup bundle so that it can be provisioned across
multiple video systems, for example using Cisco UCM or
TMS.
Provisioning of custom elements
(All products)
The backup bundle, as described above, can be
provisioned to many video systems using Cisco UCM or
TMS. It is important that device specific information is
removed when creating a backup bundle intended for
multiple video systems. If you include device specific
information in such a bundle, you may end up with
multiple video systems that cannot be reached.
By provisioning a non-system specific backup bundle,
you can for example, copy a video system’s setup with
macros, branding elements, and in-room control panels
across multiple video systems.
In-Room Control updates
(All products)
The following functionality is added to the in-room control
feature:
•
You can add buttons for up to 20 panels in total. The
buttons appear on the home screen or the in-call
screen of the user interface depending on the panel
type.
•
As before, there are three types of in-room control
panels: global panels (always available), in-call panels
(available only when in call), and out-of-call panels
(only available when not in a call). The entry point for
the global panel has been removed from the status
bar (top right corner of the user interface). Buttons
to open global panels are added to both the home
screen and the in-call screen instead, together with
the buttons for the out-of-call only and in-call only
panels, respectively.
•
You can make standalone trigger-buttons, which are
buttons that trigger an event directly, without opening
a panel on the user interface.
Currently, provisioning via Cisco UCM will not restore any
configurations, only the other custom elements; TMS will
restore everything that is included in the backup bundle.
See the release note for more details about provisioning.
Also the following features are added in the in-room
control editor:
You will find the backup and restore functionality under
Maintenance > Backup and Restore on the video system’s
web interface.
•
Some new icons are available.
•
A set of colors to choose from for the in-room-control
buttons.
•
Double click text elements to edit text directly.
•
Drag and drop in-room control XML files into the
editor.
For a full description of in-room controls, see the
Customization guide at
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
10
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Support for ISDN Link
Administrator Guide
Configuration
(All products)
Peripherals
Maintenance
Resume a postponed upgrade
(All products)
System settings
Appendices
Accessibility: Flashing screen on incoming calls
(All products)
As before, when using automatic pairing (which allows
the ISDN Link to be automatically discovered by the video
system) IPv6 must be enabled on the video system.
When you get a notification about software upgrade, you
can choose Upgrade now or Postpone. If you postpone
the upgrade, you can resume the upgrade from the
Settings > About this device menu on the user interface
when you are ready; you don’t have to wait for 6 hours
like you had to before.
One Button to Push snooze (All products)
If you don’t manually resume the upgrade, the upgrade
will start automatically after 6 hours.
The feature is disabled by default, and must be enabled
by the Accessibility IncomingCallNotification setting.
Prevent system information from being
exposed in the user interface (All products)
Screen status monitoring and control
ISDN Link with software version IL1.1.7 is supported for all
video systems that supports CE9.3.0.
You are able to snooze an One Button to Push (OBTP)
meeting reminder for 5 minutes. The snooze time cannot
be changed. The reminder typically appears if you are in
a call and a scheduled meeting is about to start. You can
snooze the reminder for 5 minutes each time it appears
until the meeting has ended.
Adjust the call rate before making a call
(All products)
As soon as you start typing in the Search or dial field, you
can open a dialog and select a custom call rate. In earlier
releases this was available only when selecting an entry
from the Directory.
If you don’t select a custom call rate, you get the rate set
in the Conference DefaultCall Rate setting.
Select ring-tone and adjust ring-tone volume
(All products)
You can select a ring-tone and adjust the ring-tone
volume from the settings menu on the user interface.
In the previous releases this was done from the web
interface.
You can prevent important system information from being
exposed in the user interface, for example:
•
IP addresses (video system, touch controller, UCM/
VCS registrar)
•
MAC address
•
Serial number
•
Software version
To enable this feature the following must be done:
•
A passphrase must be set for all users with
administrator rights
•
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode must be set to
Locked
•
UserInterface Security Mode must be set to Strong
This feature also means that the IP address is not
displayed on the screen when you disconnect a Touch
controller.
Mirrored self-view
You can configure the video system so that the screen
and Touch controller flashes red / light grey when the
system receives an incoming call. This feature is mainly
targeting hearing impaired users, making it easier for
them to notice an incoming call.
(SX10)
SX10 now has the same CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) behavior as the video systems in the Room
series.
The video system will use CEC to set the screen in
standby when the system itself enters standby, and
wake up the screen and select the correct video input
when the video system itself wakes up from standby.
CEC information from the screen is included in the video
system’s status. Of course, the screen must also support
CEC and send the relevant information to the video
system.
CEC is disabled on the video system by default, and must
be enabled in the Video Output Connector [1] CEC Mode
setting.
One common API guide
(All products)
We have gathered all API information in one API guide,
that covers all products. This is in contrast to earlier
releases were we have had one API guide per product.
(DX70, DX80)
You can configure the video system to show the self-view
image the way other people see you, or as you would
see yourself in a mirror. Use the Video Selfview Mirrored
setting. Mirrored self-view used to be available only for
Cisco DX devices running Android software.
Mirroring only applies to the self-view image, and has no
effect on the video that is sent to the far end.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
11
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.2
New product
•
Cisco Webex Room 70 (formerly Cisco Spark Room 70)
Macro framework (All products except SX10)
The macro framework allows users and integrators to
write JavaScript macros in order to automate scenarios
and customize endpoint behavior so that it suites an
individual customer’s requirements.
The combination of macros and powerful features such as
listening for events/status changes, automating execution
of commands and configurations, and providing local
control functionality for the In-Room control feature,
provides many possibilities for custom setups.
Minor behavioral changes, such as having the video
system in Do Not Disturb for an infinite amount of time,
can be easily realized by macros. Some other examples
are: Reset configurations automatically, make a call at a
certain time of the day, and issue alert or help messages
depending on status changes.
The macro editor, which also provides several example
macros, is available from the video system’s web
interface.
HDCP support (Room 55)
The video system’s second HDMI input (Connector 3)
can be configured to support HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection) protected content. This allows
customers to re-purpose the video system’s screen
by connecting devices such as a Google ChromeCast,
an AppleTV, or an HDTV decoder. This type of content
cannot be shared while in a call.
Branding and halfwake customization
HTTP Proxy support (All products)
(All products except SX10)
You can set up the video system to go through a HTTP
Proxy when registering it to Cisco’s cloud service, Cisco
Spark.
You can upload your own text and images to customize
the appearance of the screen and user interface in both
the halfwake state and the awake state.
In the Halfwake state you can:
•
•
Add a background brand image to the screen and
user interface.
•
The Settings panel is restructured.
•
The Settings panel in the user interface can be
protected by the video system’s admin password.
If the password is blank, anyone can access the
Settings and factory reset the system.
•
If you select the Russian language on the user
interface, you can choose between a Russian
keyboard and a keyboard with a Latin character set.
•
Arabic and Hebrew languages are added to the user
interface. Also localized keyboards are included.
•
Basic IEEE 802.1x settings are added to the Settings
panel in the user interface.
Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the
screen and user interface.
In the Awake state you can:
•
Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the
screen and user interface.
•
Add a label or message in the bottom left corner of
the screen (not the user interface).
Source composition
(All products except SX10, DX70, DX80)
You can compose up to four input sources (depending on
how many input sources are available on the codec) into
one image. This is the image that will be sent in the main
video stream to the far end in a call. Source composition
can only be enabled via the API, so we recommend
creating a user interface extension combined with a
macro to control the compositions on demand.
This feature replaces some of the functionality that was
provided by the TC Console application for TC software.
Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 Camera
support (Codec Plus, Room 70)
You can connect Cisco TelePresence Precision 60
cameras to Codec Plus. Note that you need a switch for
the camera control cables if you have more than one
camera. The People Count feature is not supported if
Precision 60 is the only camera type connected to the
codec.
Cisco Spark Quad Camera support
(SX80)
You can connect a Cisco Spark Quad Camera to the
SX80. Note that the Quad Camera uses only one of the
codec’s HDMI inputs, while the SpeakerTrack 60 camera
uses two. The People Count feature (in call) is also
available when using the Quad Camera.
When the connector is configured to support HDCP, it
is reserved for this type of content. This means that you
cannot share any content from this specific connector
while in a call, not even non-protected content from a
laptop.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
User interface features (All products)
12
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Support for the Snap to Whiteboard feature
(SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 70)
The Snap to Whiteboard feature is now available for
all products that have a camera with speaker track
functionality: SX80 with Cisco TelePresence Speaker
Track 60 camera or Cisco Spark Quad Camera, MX700/
MX800 with dual camera, Room Kit, Room Kit Plus,
Room 55 and Room 70.
When the video system detects a person that is speaking
close to the whiteboard, the camera view will switch to
the whiteboard area. The wizard in the Settings panel
on the Touch 10 user interface helps you to set up the
feature and define where the whiteboard area is.
Peripherals
Maintenance
Mute and unmute remote participants in a CMS
hosted conference - Active Control (All products)
When a video system is enabled for Active Control in a
CMS (2.1 or later) conference you can mute and unmute
remote participants from the participant list on the user
interface (the feature must also be enabled on the CMS).
A video system that is running software version CE9.2 will
not be unmuted directly. When you try to unmute such
a video system remotely, a message will show up on its
screen requesting the user to unmute the audio locally.
API commands for Custom input prompt
(All products)
Briefing Room mode
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
The Briefing Room feature, which was introduced already
in TC software, has been reworked. The in-room control
framework is used for creating the associated user
interface elements.
For MX700 and MX800, Briefing Room is supported only
for dual camera systems. Also, you need a Precision 60
camera, and a total of three screens.
For SX80, Briefing Room is supported when a speaker
track camera, a Precision 60 camera, and three screens
are connected. The speaker track camera can be either
Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 or Cisco Spark
Quad Camera.
USB to Serial port support
(Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 70)
You can connect a USB (Type A) to serial (D-sub
9) adapter to access the video systems API. Cisco
recommends the UC232R-10 USB to RS232 (FTDI)
adapter.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
API commands are introduced to allow for an input prompt
in the user interface: xCommand UserInterface Message
TextInput *. When issuing the display command a
prompt with your custom text, a text input field for
the user, and a submit button, shows up on the user
interface. For example, you can prompt a user to leave
feedback after an ended call. You can specify what type
of input you want from the user: single line text, numeric,
password, or PIN code.
The prompt can only be enabled via the API, so it is
recommended to combine it with macros and either a
custom user interface panel or an auto-triggered event.
Certificate upload via API (All products)
System settings
Appendices
API commands for user management (All products)
You can create and manage user accounts directly using
API commands (xCommand UserManagement User *). As
before, you can also do this from the video system’s user
interface.
Preview mode for In-Room Controls (All products)
The In-Room Control editor has a new preview mode.
A virtual touch interface shows how the design looks.
The user interface is interactive so that you can test the
functionality. It produces real events on the video system,
which can trigger any functionality you have created with
a third-party control system. A console in the right pane
displays both the widget values when interacted with, and
control system feedback messages.
Intelligent Proximity changes (All products)
A Proximity indicator is displayed on the screen (middle
right) to inform that one or more clients are paired to the
system with Cisco Proximity. The old indicator (top left),
which was always shown when Proximity was enabled,
has been removed.
You can no longer disable the Proximity services from the
user interface.
The ultrasound settings have moved from Peripherals
Pairing Ultrasound to Audio Ultrasound.
ASCII PEM formatted certificates can be installed
directly using multiline API commands (xCommand
Security Certificates CA Add, or xCommand Security
Certificates Services Add). You can also upload
certificates to a video system from its web interface, as
before.
13
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Automatic factory reset when changing the call
service - device activation (All products)
The video system will automatically factory reset and
restart when using the user interface to change the
device activation method, for example from VCS to Cisco
UCM. This will prevent conflicting configurations when
provisioning the video system to a new service.
Changing the provisioning from the API will not
automatically factory reset the video system.
Support for separate RTP port ranges for audio
and other media (All products)
You can configure the video system so that audio uses
a different RTP port range than other media. The two
ranges cannot overlap. As default, all media use the same
RTP port range.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
14
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.1
New products
•
Cisco Webex Codec Plus (formerly Cisco Spark
Codec Plus)
•
Cisco Webex Room 55 (formerly Cisco Spark
Room 55)
Bluetooth headset support (DX70, DX80)
Additions for Room Analytics
A Bluetooth headset can be used with the video system.
The headset must support HFP (Hands Free Protocol).
The user can enable Bluetooth and set the video system
in Bluetooth pairing mode from the user interface.
(All products except SX10, DX70, DX80)
Dual Screen experience and Active Control for
CMS based meetings
Support for the EAP authentication framework
for wireless networks
(SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55)
(DX70, DX80, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55)
Dual screen video systems can utilize both screens
for video in a CMS based meeting. The video system
receives two transcoded video streams and one content
stream from the CMS, and utilizes both screens to render
the streams.
In addition to WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK, the video system
now supports the WPA-EAP authentication framework
for Wi-Fi connections. In total the following methods are
supported:
With Active Control enabled, you get a participant list
that shows all meeting participants and their current
activity status, such as mute, sharing and active speaker
indication. You can change the layout seamlessly from the
touch interface by using the layout selection panels.
New wake-up experience
(All products)
SX10, DX70, DX80: The wake-up experience has an
additional standby state: Halfwake. In Halfwake state, the
video system shows a simple on-screen interaction guide
when it is not in use.
•
Open
•
WPA-PSK (AES)
•
WPA2-PSK (AES)
•
EAP-TLS
•
EAP-TTLS
•
EAP-FAST
•
PEAP
•
EAP-MSCHAPv2
•
EAP-GTC
Detect people presence in the room: The video system
has the capability to find whether there are people
present in the room. The feature is based on ultrasound,
and it does not keep record of who was in the room, only
whether or not the room is in use.
People count (only for Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55):
The video system counts the number of people in the
room when in a call, and when displaying the self-view
picture. You can configure the video system to also count
the number of people outside of call, but the video system
cannot count the number of people when it is in standby.
It does not keep record of who was in the room, only the
number of faces that were detected.
Network port 2 can be disabled (DX70, DX80)
You can connect a computer to the network through the
video system’s second network port. Then you only need
one network wall socket to support both the video system
and the computer.
For security reasons, we recommend that you disable
this network port if the video system is used in a public
environment. This way, you prevent someone from
connecting a computer to your network through the video
system.
Other products: The wake-up experience has two
additional standby states: Halfwake and Standby with
motion detection. When automatic wake-up is enabled,
the video system detects presence using ultrasound
(motion detection) or when pairing to a Cisco Proximity
client. The video system wakes up with a greeting before
going into the Halfwake state, which has a simple onscreen interaction guide.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
15
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.0
New product
•
Updated In-Room Control editor (All products)
Cisco Webex Room Kit (formerly Cisco Spark Room Kit)
Updated user interface
(All products)
The user interfaces on the Touch 10, on screen, and on
integrated touch screens have been updated. The main
menu items on the home screen have been replaced with
more prominent activities.
Some of the settings have been removed from the Touch
10 advanced settings menu to align with the on-screen
display menu.
Wakeup on motion detection (All products)
Wakeup on motion detection senses when a person walks
into the conference room and the video system wakes up
automatically. You need to enable the following setting for
this feature to work:
The In-Room Control editor is updated with a new look,
improved logic and usability for producing a control
interface more efficiently. In addition, a new directional
pad widget and an In-Room Control simulator is added.
Added language support (All products)
We have added support for Potuguese (Portugal) to the
on-screen display and Touch controller menus.
Other changes (All products)
•
Support for HTTPS client certificates has been added.
•
Unplugging the presentation cable stops the
presentation sharing instantly.
xConfiguration Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
You can’t manually set the video system in standby when
this feature is enabled.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
16
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.7
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
HttpClient AllowHTTP (All products)
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Logging Debug Wifi
NEW: 1/2/3/4
70, Room 70 G2)
Logging Internal Mode
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
OLD: 1/2/3/4/5
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, DX70, DX80, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
(All products)
OLD: 1/2/3/4/5
NetworkServices Websocket (All products)
NEW: 1/2/3/4/5/6
Phonebook Server [1] Pagination (All products)
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource (MX700, MX800, SX80)
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room
OLD: 1/2/3/4/5
55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
UserInterface Features Call VideoMute
NEW: 1/2/3/4
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800,
CallHistory Mode (All products)
Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX10, SX20, SX80)
OLD: Public: False
UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start (DX70, DX80)
UserInterface Phonebook Mode
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
UserInterface UsbPromotion
NEW: Public: True
(All products)
Conference Multipoint Mode (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, Room
(All products)
Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX20, SX80)
OLD: Public: False
(Room Kit Mini)
NEW: Public: True
Logging External Mode (All products)
OLD: Public: False
NEW: Public: True
Logging External Protocol
(All products)
OLD: Public: False
NEW: Public: True
Logging External Server Address
(All products)
OLD: Public: False
NEW: Public: True
Logging External Server Port (All products)
OLD: Public: False
NEW: Public: True
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
17
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

SIP ANAT
Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Configurations that are removed
(All products)
OLD: Public: False
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall (MX700, MX800)
NEW: Public: True
Video Input Connector [6] CameraControl Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: On
NEW: Default: Off
OLD: On
NEW: On/Off
Video Presentation Priority (All products)
OLD: Public: False
NEW: Public: True
OLD: Equal/High
NEW: Equal/High/Low
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
18
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.6
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Channel (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ARC [1] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: Auto
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
NEW: Default: On
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode (Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
OLD: Value space: Off / On / Auto
Audio Input HDMI [2..5] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo (Room 70 G2)
Audio Microphones PhantomPower
NEW: Value space: Off / On
(Codec Plus, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Room 55, Room Kit, SX20)
Audio Output HDMI [1..3] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ConnectorSetup (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: Auto (Codec Pro)
Audio Output HDMI [n] Level (MX700, MX800)
NEW: Default: On (Codec Pro)
Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode
OLD: Default, HDMI [2..3]: Auto (Room 70G2 Single)
(Codec Plus, MX700, MX800)
NEW: Default, HDMI [2..3]: Off (Room 70G2 Single)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (MX700, MX800, Room 55 Dual, Room 70)
OLD: Default, HDMI [3]: Auto (Room 70G2 Dual)
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer ID (Room 70 G2)
NEW: Default, HDMI [3]: Off (Room 70G2 Dual)
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer Mode (Room 70 G2)
OLD: Value space: Off / On / Auto (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS
NEW: Value space: Off / On (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
(All products)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode
HttpClient Mode (All products)
(Room 55, Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
OLD: Default: Auto (Room 70 G2)
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] Key (All products)
NEW: Default: On (Room 70 G2)
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] KeyId (All products)
OLD: Value space: Off / On / Auto (Room 70 G2)
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] KeyAlgorithm (All products)
NEW: Value space: Off / On / UltrasoundOnly (Room 70 G2)
Peripherals InputDevice Mode (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Value space: Off / On (Room 55, Room Kit)
NEW: Value space: Off / On / UltrasoundOnly (Room 55, Room Kit)
UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors (All products)
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume (SX20)
UserInterface Features Call End (All products)
UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls
UserInterface Features Call Start
OLD: Default: 70
(All products)
NEW: Default: 60
(All products)
Provisioning Mode (All products)
UserInterface Features HideAll (All products)
OLD: Value space: Auto / CUCM / Edge / Off / TMS / VCS / Spark
UserInterface Features Share Start
NEW: Value space: Auto / CUCM / Edge / Off / TMS / VCS / Webex
(All products)
Provisioning Mode (Room 55 Dual)
Video Input Connector [n] HDCP Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: Off
Video Output Connector [2] CEC Mode (Room 70 Single)
NEW: Default: On
Video Presentation Priority (All products)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
19
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Configurations that are removed
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (Room 55 Dual)
OLD: Default: Off
Conference MultiStream Mode
NEW: Default: On
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System settings
SIP PreferredIPMedia
20
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, SX20)
(All products)
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.5
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Audio Input ARC [n] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Input Microphone[1..8] Equalizer ID (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Value space: Integer (1..14)
Audio Output ARC [1] Delay DelayMs (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ARC [1] Delay Mode
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..8)
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume (SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ARC [1] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default value: 70 (SX80, Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Room 70 G2)
NEW: Default value: 60 (SX80, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output Line [1] Mode (Codec Plus, Room 55)
NEW: Default value: 66 (MX700, MX800)
Audio Output Line [1] OutputType (Codec Plus, Room 55
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..90) (Room 70 G2)
NEW: Value space: Integer (0..80) (Room 70 G2)
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm (All products)
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector
Peripherals InputDevice Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default value: 1 (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Room 70 G2)
NEW: Default value: 6 (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall (SX80)
OLD: Value space: Integer (1..5) (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..3) (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Configurations that are removed
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..6) (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Codec Pro)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft
Video Input Connector [3,4,5] PreferredResolution (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
(Room 70 G2)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode
OLD: Default value: 3840_2160_30
NEW: Default value: 1920_1080_60
(Room 70 G2)
(Room 70 G2)
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode (Room 70 G2)
Provisioning RoomType ClassroomEnabled
(SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
21
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.4
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
New configurations
Audio Input HDMI [1..2] Mode
OLD: Default value: 60 (MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
(Room 55)
OLD: Default value: 70 (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
Audio Input HDMI [1..2] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo (Room 55)
NEW: Default value: 50
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
Audio Output Line [1] OutputType (Room 70)
NEW: Default value: 60 (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [1] Backlight DefaultMode (DX70, DX80)
NEW: Default value: 64 (Room 55)
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..80) (MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
Cameras Camera [1..2] Mirror (MX700, MX800)
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..90) (Room 55, Room 70)
Conference FarendMessage Mode (All products)
NEW: Value space: Integer (0..70) (MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
SIP MinimumTLSVersion (All products)
NEW: Value space: Integer (0..80) (Room 70)
NEW: Value space: Integer (0..84) (Room 55)
Configurations that are removed
Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode (All products)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Video Output Connector [2] CEC Mode (DX70, DX80)
NEW: User role: ADMIN
Network [1] Speed (All products)
Video Output Connector [2] Location HorizontalOffset (DX70, DX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Video Output Connector [2] Location VerticalOffset (DX70, DX80)
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Video Output Connector [2] OverscanLevel (DX70, DX80)
NetworkServices HTTP Mode (All products)
Video Output Connector [2] Resolution (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Default value: HTTP+HTTPS
Video Output Connector [2] RGBQuantizationRange (DX70, DX80)
NEW: Default value: HTTPS
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName (All products)
Configurations that are modified
OLD: User role: ADMIN
Audio Output Line [1] OutputType (Room Kit)
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
OLD: Default value: LineOut
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address (All products)
NEW: Default value: Loudspeaker
OLD: User role: ADMIN
OLD: Value space: LineOut / Subwoofer
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: Value space: LineOut / Loudspeaker / Recorder / Subwoofer
NetworkServices SNMP Mode (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
22
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
UserInterface ContactInfo Type (SX10, DX70, DX80)
OLD: Value space: Auto / DisplayName / IPv4 / IPv6 / None / SipUri / SystemName
NEW: Value space: Auto / DisplayName / E164Alias / H320Number / H323Id / IPv4 /
IPv6 / None / SipUri / SystemName
Video Output Connector [1] CEC Mode
(SX10)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Output Connector [3] Resolution (SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
23
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.3
New configurations
Configurations that are removed
Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate (Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 70)
Provisioning HttpMethod (All products)
Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled (Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 70)
Configurations that are modified
Cameras Camera [1..3] AssignedSerialNumber (Codec Plus, Room 70)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed (All products)
Cameras Camera [3] Backlight DefaultMode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
OLD: Default value: True
Cameras Camera [3] Brightness DefaultLevel (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Brightness Mode
NEW: Default value: False
(Codec Plus, Room 70)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode (All products)
Cameras Camera [3] Focus Mode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
OLD: Value space: Manual/Off
NEW: Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
Cameras Camera [3] Gamma Level (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Proximity Mode (Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Gamma Mode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
OLD: Default value: Off
Cameras Camera [3] Mirror (Codec Plus, Room 70)
NEW: Default value: On
Cameras Camera [3] Whitebalance Level (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Whitebalance Mode
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser (All products)
(Codec Plus, Room 70)
OLD: Default value: 0
Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode (All products)
NEW: Default value: 20
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl (All products)
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..100)
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced (All products)
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..20)
Security Session MaxTotalSessions (All products)
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode (All products)
OLD: Default value: 0
SystemUnit CrashReporting URL (All products)
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification
NEW: Default value: 20
(All products)
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..100)
UserInterface Security Mode (All products)
NEW: Value space: Integer (1..20)
Video Selfview Mirrored (DX70, DX80)
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (Room 70)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Input Connector[2] Name
(Room 55)
OLD: Default value: “PC 1 (HDMI)”
NEW: Default value: “”
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
24
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Video Input Connector[3] Name
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(Room 55)
OLD: Default value: “PC 2 (HDMI)”
NEW: Default value: “”
Video Input Connector[1] CEC Mode (Room 70)
OLD: Value space: Off/On
NEW: Value space: On
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
25
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.2
New configurations
Configurations that are removed
Audio Input HDMI[n] Mode (Codec Plus)
Conference MultiStream Mode
Audio Input HDMI[n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo (Codec Plus, Room Kit)
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel (All products)
Replaced by Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Room 55)
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Mode (All products)
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume (All products)
Replaced by Audio Ultrasound Mode
Replacing Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel
Audio Ultrasound Mode
(All products)
Configurations that are modified
Replacing Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Model
Audio Input MicrophoneMode (DX70, DX80)
Cameras Camera[1..2] Focus Mode (MX700, MX800)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
Added for the integrated cameras
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
(Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55)
Audio Input Microphone[n] Level (Room Kit, Room 55)
Macros AutoStart (All products except SX10)
Macros Mode
OLD: Value space: 0..36
NEW: Value space: 0..26
(All products except SX10)
Cameras Camera[n] Focus Mode (SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed (All products)
OLD: Value space: Auto/Manual
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName (All products)
NEW: Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode (All products)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup (SX80, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password (All products
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url (All products)
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
RTP Video Ports Range Start (All products)
RTP Video Ports Range Stop
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode (SX80, MX700, MX800)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
(All products)
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime (All products)
Security Session MaxFailedLogins
UserInterface CustomMessage
Security Audit Logging Mode (All products)
(All products)
OLD: Default value: Off
(All products)
NEW: Default value: Internal
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage (All products)
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
(SX10, DX70, DX80)
UserInterface Language
(All products)
Video Input Connector[n] HDCP Mode
(All products)
NEW: Arabic and Hebrew added to valuespace
(Room 55)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
26
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
UserInterface OSD Output (Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: 1
NEW: Default value: Auto
Video Input Connector[2] Name
(Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: Default value: PC (HDMI1)
NEW: Default value: PC 1 (HDMI)
Video Input Connector[3] Name
(Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: Default value: PC (HDMI2)
NEW: Default value: PC 2 (HDMI)
Video Output Connector[1] Resolution (MX200G2, MX300G2, DX70, DX80, Room 55)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Video Selfview OnCall Mode (Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
27
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.1
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Bluetooth Allowed (DX70, DX80)
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Bluetooth Enabled (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Default value: 3072
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus, Room Kit)
NEW: Default value: 6000
Cameras Camera Framerate (Room Kit)
Conference MultiStream Mode (SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus, Room Kit)
NetworkPort [2] Mode (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Default value: Off
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall (Codec Plus, Room Kit)
NEW: Default value: Auto
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus,
OLD: Valuespace: Off
Room Kit)
NEW: Valuespace: Auto/Off
Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode (Codec Plus, Room Kit)
Network[ 1] IEEE8021X Password (All products)
OLD: Valuespace: String(0, 32)
Configurations that are removed
NEW: Valuespace: String(0, 50)
None
NetworkServices Wifi Enabled (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Default value: False
NEW: Default value: True
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels (SX80, Codec Plus, Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: NotSet
NEW: Default value: Minimum1
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Codec Plus,
Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection (All products)
OLD: Valuespace: AutoShare/Manual/OnConnect
(SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2,,
MX700, MX800, Codec Plus, Room Kit)
OLD: Valuespace: AutoShare/Desktop/Hidden/Manual/OnConnect
(DX70, DX80)
NEW: Valuespace: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect (All products)
Video Output Connector [1..2] MonitorRole
(Room Kit, Codec Plus)
OLD: Default value: Connector [1]: First; Connector [2]: Second
NEW: Default value: Auto
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
28
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration changes in CE9.0
New configurations
Configurations that are modified
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup (SX80, MX700, MX800)
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
Cameras Camera [n] * (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
(All products)
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity (All products)
Cameras PresenterTrack * (SX80, MX700, MX800)
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2,
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
MX700, MX800)
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (All products)
Cameras SpeakerTrack * (SX80, MX700, MX800)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
Configurations that are removed
UserInterface UserPreferences
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
(All products)
Audio Microphones PhantomVoltage
Conference MultiStream Mode (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
(SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
OLD: Value space: Auto/Off
Conference VideoBandwidth PresentationChannel Weight (All products)
NEW: Value space: Off
Standby AudioMotionDetection (All products)
NetworkServices Wifi Allowed (DX70, DX80)
Renamed from NetworkServices WIFI Allowed
Video Layout DisableDisconnectedLocalOutputs (SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, USER
NetworkServices Wifi Enabled (DX70, DX80)
Renamed from NetworkServices WIFI Enabled
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, USER
UserInterface Language
(All products)
NEW: Portuguese added to value space
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
29
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Configurations with the new INTEGRATOR user role
Standby Control (MX700, MX800)
A new user role - INTEGRATOR - is introduced in CE9.0. It has been added to the following
configurations:
Standby Delay (MX700, MX800)
Standby StandbyAction (MX700, MX800)
Audio DefaultVolume (All products)
Standby WakeupAction (MX700, MX800)
Audio Input HDMI [n] * (SX80, MX700, MX800)
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (MX700, MX800)
Audio Input Line [n] * (SX20, SX80, MX700, MX800)
SystemUnit Name (All products)
Audio Input Microphone [n] * (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement *
Time Zone (All products)
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
UserInterface OSD Output (All products)
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled (All products)
UserInterface Wallpaper
Audio Output HDMI [n] * (SX80)
CallHistory Mode
(All products)
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition
Audio Output Line [n] * (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX700, MX800)
Audio SoundsAndAlerts *
Appendices
(All products)
Video Input Connector [n] * (SX10, DX70, DX80)
(All products)
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700,
MX800)
(All products)
Cameras Camera [n] * (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Cameras PowerLine Frequency
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Cameras PresenterTrack *
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Input Connector [n] Name (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
Cameras SpeakerTrack * (SX80, MX700, MX800)
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
(All products)
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
Video Input Connector [n] Quality
(All products)
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
FacilityService * (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
GPIO Pin [n] Mode
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume MaxLevel (All products)
Video Monitors
Peripherals Pairing Ultrasound Volume Mode (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] * (SX80, MX700, MX800)
Peripherals Profile * (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode
SerialPort BaudRate
Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset (SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
(SX20, SX80, MX700, MX800)
(All products)
(SX10, SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
SerialPort Mode (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] Location VerticalOffset (SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
Standby * (SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
Standby BootAction
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution (SX10, SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
(MX700, MX800)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
30
(SX20)
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Video Output Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange (SX10, SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
(All products)
Video Selfview Default * (All products)
Video Selfview OnCall * (All products)
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
31
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 1 of 6)
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800 are part of the
performance line within the Cisco portfolio of integrated
video collaboration room systems. These systems integrate
powerful functionality into an all-in-one solution for mediumto-large meeting rooms. The MX700 has two 55” LED
monitors, MX800 Single has one 70” LED monitor, and
MX800 Dual has two 70” LED monitors.
The MX700 and MX800 systems come standard with a builtin amplifier and speaker system for high fidelity sound. You
can choose from a single camera, or a dual camera speakertracking solution for MX700 and MX800 Single; MX800 Dual
comes only with the dual camera speaker-tracking solution.
Both cameras deliver the best possible video imaging with
up to 20x zoom and 1080p60 resolution. Premium resolution
and dual display are also standard features on the MX700
and MX800. The Cisco Touch 10 provides an easy-to-use
interface for both MX700 and MX800 systems.
MX700
with single camera
Industry standards compliance lets the MX700 and MX800
support calls with any third party, standards-based system,
including software-based video conferencing solutions. And,
as the industry’s first H.265-ready systems (in SIP calls), the
MX700 and MX800 lay the foundation for future bandwidth
efficiencies.
MX800 Single
with single camera
MX700
with dual camera
MX800 Single
with dual camera
MX800 Dual
Features and benefits
•
Ability to connect up to four HD input sources and
eight microphones directly to the codec.
One button to push (OBTP) to start a meeting.
•
•
Ideal for team-based collaboration, boardrooms,
meeting rooms and video centric rooms.
Full duplex audio with high-quality sound in mono, and
stereo.
•
•
Dual presentation outside of a call (e.g. use the
MX700 dual screens to compare two presentations or
documents).
Cisco TelePresence ClearPath packet loss protection
technology.
•
Built-in speaker tracking system as option.
•
Optimal definition up to 1080p60.
Native support for Cisco Unified Communications
Manager (requires Cisco Unified Communications
Manager version 8.6 or higher).
Embedded MultiSite conferencing option that
allows up to four additional participants (individual
transcoding, no external bridge).
•
H.323/SIP up to 6 Mbps point-to-point.
•
Up to 10 Mbps total MultiSite bandwidth.
Powerful and feature-rich video systems with ultimate
video and audio quality.
•
Four simultaneous video inputs.
•
High performance video collaboration codec.
•
1080p60 main video and 1080p30 content.
•
High-definition pan-tilt-zoom camera.
•
•
Everything you need in one unit: screen(s), speakers,
codec, camera, microphones.
•
Three mounting options: wall mount, free standing
floor stand, floor stand secured to the wall.
•
•
•
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
32
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 2 of 6)
MX700 with a single camera
Camera
Mounting options
(20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
Two 55” monitors
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
33
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 3 of 6)
MX700 with dual camera
Dual camera assembly
Mounting options
(speaker-track, 20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
Two 55” monitors
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
34
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 4 of 6)
MX800 Single with single camera
Camera
Mounting options
(20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
70” monitor
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
35
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 5 of 6)
MX800 Single with dual camera
Dual camera assembly
Mounting options
(speaker-track, 20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
70” monitor
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
36
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
MX700 and MX800 at a glance (page 6 of 6)
MX800 Dual
Dual camera assembly
Mounting options
(speaker-track, 20x zoom, 1080p60)
Loudspeakers
(full range multichannel and bass)
Two 70” monitors
Free standing floor stand
Embedded codec
Floor stand secured to the wall
Microphones
(default: two; maximum: eight)
Touch 10 user interface
Wall mount
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
37
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Power On and Off
Power On/Off with the Power switch
The power switch is behind the left side cover.
Restart and standby using the user
interface
It is located in the same place for both MX700,
MX800 Single and MX800 Dual, all mounting options.
Restart the system
1. Remove the left side cover. It snaps to magnets.
2. The power switch is next to the power connector
below the codec.
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of
the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by Restart.
3. Select Restart again to confirm your choice.
Enter/exit standby mode
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of
the user interface.
2. Select Standby.
Power switch
Power Off or restart the system remotely
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Restart.
Restart the system
Click Restart device... and confirm your choice.
It takes a few minutes before the system is ready for use.
Power Off the system
Click Shutdown device... and confirm your choice.
You cannot power the system on again remotely.
For the system to power up after a remote
shutdown, turn the power switch Off and then On.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
38
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
LED indicators (page 1 of 3)
MX700
System LED /
Camera failure LED
System LED /
Camera failure LED
This LED operates as
both system LED and
camera failure LED.
Camera failure LED
Codec LEDs
Codec LEDs
You must remove the
side cover to be able
to see the codec
LEDs.
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
This LED operates as
both system LED and
camera failure LED for
the right camera in a
dual camera assembly.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
The side cover
is fastened with
magnets.
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
System LED
Codec LEDs
Camera failure LED
Sub-system failure LEDs
Blinking:
System failure:
Steady red light:
There are four LEDs underneath the
monitor(s). Normally, they are not lit.
The video system is starting up.
Pulsating:
The video system is in standby mode.
Lights steady (red) when there is a
serious problem with the codec.
The camera has a serious error.
Power:
Lights steady (white) when the codec
has power.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
A steady red light indicates serious error,
and you should contact the Cisco support
organization.
The LEDs mean (numbered from left to right):
1. Monitor failure.
2. Power failure for LCD monitor or camera
sub-systems.
3. Power failure for audio sub-system.
4. Power failure for LCD monitor backlight.
39
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
LED indicators (page 2 of 3)
MX800 Single
System LED / Camera failure LED
System LED / Camera failure LED
This LED operates as both system
LED and camera failure LED.
Camera failure LED
Codec LEDs
Codec LEDs
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
This LED operates as both system
LED and camera failure LED for
the right camera in a dual camera
assembly.
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
System LED
Codec LEDs
Camera failure LED
Sub-system failure LEDs
Blinking:
System failure:
Steady red light:
There are four LEDs underneath the
monitor(s). Normally, they are not lit.
The video system is starting up.
Pulsating:
The video system is in standby mode.
Lights steady (red) when there is a
serious problem with the codec.
The camera has a serious error.
Power:
Lights steady (white) when the codec
has power.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
A steady red light indicates serious error,
and you should contact the Cisco support
organization.
The LEDs mean (numbered from left to right):
1. Monitor failure.
2. Power failure for LCD monitor or camera
sub-systems.
3. Power failure for audio sub-system.
4. Power failure for LCD monitor backlight.
40
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
LED indicators (page 3 of 3)
MX800 Dual
System LED / Camera failure LED
Camera failure LED
This LED operates as both system LED
and camera failure LED for the right
camera in a dual camera assembly.
Codec LEDs
You must remove the
side cover to be able to
see the codec LEDs.
The side cover is
fastened with magnets.
Sub-system failure LEDs
Sub-system failure LEDs
System LED
Codec LEDs
Camera failure LED
Sub-system failure LEDs
Blinking:
System failure:
Steady red light:
There are four LEDs underneath the
monitor(s). Normally, they are not lit.
The video system is starting up.
Pulsating:
The video system is in standby mode.
Lights steady (red) when there is a
serious problem with the codec.
The camera has a serious error.
Power:
Lights steady (white) when the codec
has power.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
A steady red light indicates serious error,
and you should contact the Cisco support
organization.
The LEDs mean (numbered from left to right):
1. Monitor failure.
2. Power failure for LCD monitor or camera
sub-systems.
3. Power failure for audio sub-system.
4. Power failure for LCD monitor backlight.
41
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 1 of 4)
In general, we recommend you to use the web interface
to administer and maintain the video system, as
described in this administrator guide.
Access method
HTTP/HTTPS
Alternatively, you can access the API of the video
system by other methods:
Notes
How to enable/disable the methods
• Used by the web interface of the video system
NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode
• Non-secure (HTTP) or secure (HTTPS)
communication
Restart the video system for changes
to take effect
•
HTTP or HTTPS (also used by the web interface)
• HTTPS: Enabled by default
•
SSH
•
Telnet
•
Serial interface (RS-232)
• HTTP: Enabled by default only for video systems
that have been upgraded to CE9.4 (or later) from
an earlier software version, provided that the
video system has not been factory reset after the
upgrade.
If you want more information about the different access
methods, and how to use the API, refer to the API guide
for the video system.
Tip
Telnet
SSH
If the configuration or status is available in the API, the
web interface setting or status translates into an API
configuration or status as follows:
Set X > Y > Z to Value (web)
is the same as
Serial interface (RS-232)
• Non-secure TCP/IP connection
NetworkServices > Telnet > Mode
• Disabled by default
You do not need to restart the video
system. It may take some time for
changes to take effect
• Secure TCP/IP connection
NetworkServices > SSH > Mode
• Enabled by default
You do not need to restart the video
system. It may take some time for
changes to take effect
• Connect to the video system with a cable. IPaddress, DNS, or a network is not required
SerialPort > Mode
xConfiguration X Y Z: Value (API)
• Enabled by default
Check X > Y > Z status (web)
is the same as
xStatus X Y Z (API)
• We recommend using the default baud rate,
because the video system may return much
feedback (SerialPort > BaudRate)
For example:
Set SystemUnit > Name to MySystem
is the same as
xConfiguration SystemUnit Name: MySystem
Restart the video system for changes
to take effect
• For security reasons, you are asked to sign in by
default (SerialPort > LoginRequired)
If all access methods are disabled (set to Off), you can no longer configure the video system. You are not able to reenable (set to On) any of the access methods, and you must factory reset the video system to recover.
Check SystemUnit > Software > Version status
is the same as
xStatus SystemUnit Software Version
More settings and statuses are available in the web
interface than in the API.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
42
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 2 of 4)
The web interface of the video system
The web interface is the administration portal for
the video system. You can connect from a computer
and administer the system remotely. It provides full
configuration access and offers tools and mechanisms
for maintenance.
Note: The web interface requires that HTTP or HTTPS
is enabled (refer to NetworkServices > HTTP > Mode
setting).
Connect to the video system
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the
video system in the address bar.
How to find the IP address
1. Select the contact information in the
upper left corner of the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by About this
device.
We recommend that you use the latest release of one
of the major web browsers.
Sign in
Enter user name and passphrase for the endpoint and
click Sign In.
The system is delivered with a default user
named admin with no passphrase. Leave the
Passphrase field blank when signing in for the
first time.
It is mandatory to set a password for the
admin user.
Sign out
Hover the mouse over
the user name and
choose Signout from
the drop-down list.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
43
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 3 of 4)
How the web interface is organized
The web interface is organized in sub-pages. All sub-pages
shown below are available if the video system is registerd to an
on-premise service (CUCM, VCS); the pages shown in grey color
are not available if the video system is registered to the Cisco
cloud service (Cisco Webex).
In both cases, a user that is signed in, sees only the pages that he
has access rights for.
Read more about user administration, user roles and access
rights in the ► User administration chapter.
Main menu
Home
Call Control
Setup
Security
Maintenance
Integration
Configuration
Users
Diagnostics
In-Room Control
Status
Service Certificates
System Logs
Macro Editor
Peripherals
CUCM Certificates
Call Logs
Startup Scripts
Personalization
Certificate Authorities
User Interface Screenshots
Developer API
Favorites
Strong Security Mode
Software Upgrade
Room Types
Sign In Banner
Option Keys
Presenter Tracking
Non-persistent Mode
Backup and Restore
System Recovery
Audio Console
Restart
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
44
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
How to administer the video system (page 4 of 4)
Settings and system information on the user interface
You have access to system information, and some basic
configurations and system tests on the video system’s user
interface.
System-critical settings and functions, such as network settings,
service activation, and factory reset, may be protected by a
passphrase, refer to the ► Restrict the access to the Settings
menu chapter.
Some of the settings and tests are also part of the Setup assistant
that is launched when the video system is powered up for the
first time. The Setup assistant is described in the Getting Started
Guide for systems running CE software.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Access Settings
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface.
2. Select Settings.
A padlock symbol
(locked down).
indicates that a setting is protected
3. Select the setting you want to change, or the test you want to
run.
If a setting is locked down, an authentication window pops up,
and you have to sign in with ADMIN credentials to proceed.
45
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 2
Configuration
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
46
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
User administration
You have to sign in to get access to the web and command line
interfaces. You can assign different roles to users, to determine
what they should have access to.
The default user account
The video system comes with a default administrator user
account with full access rights. The user name is admin and no
passphrase is initially set.
Edit an existing user account
User roles
If you make changes to a user that holds the Admin role, you must
always enter your own passphrase in the Your passphrase input
field for verification.
A user account may hold one or a
combination of user roles. A user account
with full access rights, like the default
admin user, should possess the ADMIN,
USER and AUDIT roles.
Change the user privileges
These are the user roles:
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Security > Users.
ADMIN: A user with this role can create
new users, change most settings, make
calls, and search the contact lists. The
user cannot upload audit certificates and
change the security audit settings.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the admin user.
Read how to set the passphrase in the ► Change the system
passphrase chapter.
Create a new user account
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
2. Click Add new user....
3. Fill in the Username, Passphrase and Repeat passphrase input
fields.
As a default, the user has to change the passphrase when he
signs in for the first time.
Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished Name) field only
if you use client certificates for authentication.
4. Check the appropriate Roles check boxes.
If you assign the ADMIN role to a user, enter your own
passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.
3. Choose user roles, set the status to Acitve or
Inactive, and decide if the user has to change the
passphrase on the next sign in.
USER: A user with this role can make
calls and search the contact lists. The
user can modify a few settings, for
example adjust the ringtone volume and
set the time and date format.
Fill in the Client Certificate DN (Distinguished
Name) field only if you use certificate login on
HTTPS.
4. Click Edit User to save the changes.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
Change the passphrase
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
3. Enter the new passphrase in the appropriate input fields.
4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
6. Click Create User.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
ROOMCONTROL: A user with this role
can create in-room controls. The user
has access to the In-room control editor
and corresponding development tools.
INTEGRATOR: A user with this role has
access to settings, commands and status
that are required to set up advanced AV
scenarios, and to integrate our video
systems with 3rd party equipment. Such a
user can also create in-room controls.
Delete the user account
5. Set the Status to Active to activate the user.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
AUDIT: A user with this role can change
the security audit settings and upload
audit certificates.
3. Click Delete user... and confirm when prompted.
47
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Change the system passphrase
You need to know the system passphrase in order to:
•
Sign in to the web interface
•
Sign in and use the command line interfaces
The default user account
The video system is delivered with a default user account with
full access rights. The user name is admin, and initially, no
passphrase is set.
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the default admin
user in order to restrict access to system configuration. It
is also mandatory to set a passphrase for any other user
with ADMIN rights.
A warning, saying that the system passphrase is not set, is shown
on screen until a passphrase is set for the admin user.
Other user accounts
Change your passphrase
1. Sign in to the web interface, hover the mouse over the user
name, and choose Change Passphrase in the drop down list.
2. Enter the current passphrase and new passphrase in the input
fields, and click Change passphrase.
The passphrase format is a string with 0–64 characters.
If the passphrase currently is not set, leave the Current
passphrase field blank.
Change another user’s passphrase
If you have administrator access rights, you can change the
password of any user.
You can create many user accounts for the video system.
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Security > Users.
Read more about how to create and manage user accounts in the
► User administration chapter.
2. Click the appropriate user in the list.
3. Enter the new passphrase in the Passphrase and Repeat
passphrase input fields.
If the user holds the Admin role, you must enter your own
passphrase in the Your passphrase input field for verification.
4. Click Change passphrase to save the change.
Use the Back button to leave without making any changes.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
48
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Restrict the access to the Settings menu
By default, any user has access to the Settings menu on the user
interface.
We recommend that you restrict the access to prevent
unauthorized users from changing the configuration of the video
system.
The Settings menu on the user interface
If the menu is locked down, you must sign in to access the
system-critical settings.
Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface followed by Settings, in order to open the Settings
menu.
Lock down the Settings menu
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Configuration.
2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode, and select
Locked.
3. Click Save for the change to take effect.
Now a user has to sign in with ADMIN credentials to get
access to the system-critical settings on the user interface
(Touch controller).
Unlock the Settings menu
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Configuration.
2. Go to UserInterface > SettingsMenu > Mode, and select
Unlocked.
3. Click Save for the change to take effect.
Now any user has access to the complete Settings menu on
the user interface (Touch controller).
Unlock settings
Locked down settings
Locked down settings are marked with a padlock.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
49
If you click on the padlock, you are asked
to sign in with an ADMIN user.
Once signed in, you can access all
settings until you close the Settings
menu.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
System configuration
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
Find a system setting
Search for settings
Change a system setting
About system settings
Check the value space
All system settings can be changed from
the web interface.
A settings’s value space is specified either by text following
the input field or in a drop-down list that opens when you
click the arrow.
Each system setting is described in the
► System settings chapter.
Different settings may require different
user credentials. In order to be sure that
an administrator is able to change all
system settings, an administrator user
must possess all user roles.
Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All settings
that contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Settings
that have these letters in their value space are also shown.
You can read more about user
administration and user roles in the
► User administration chapter.
Change a value
1. Choose the preferred value from the drop-down list, or
enter new text in the input field.
2. Click Save for the change to take effect.
Use the Undo or Revert buttons if you do not want to
make any changes.
Select a category and navigate to settings
The system settings are grouped in categories. Choose a
category in the left pane to show the associated settings.
Categories with unsaved changes are marked with an edit
).
symbol (
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
50
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Add a sign in banner
About sign in banner
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate
to Security > Sign In Banner.
If a system administrator wants to provide
initial information to all users, he can
create a sign in banner. The message is
shown when the user signs in to the web
interface or the command line interface.
1. Enter the message that you want to
present to the user when he signs in.
2. Click Save to activate the banner.
The maximum size is: 4 kByte
Welcome banner versus sign in
banner
Sign in banner:
•
The banner is shown before the user
signs in to the web interface or the
command line interface.
Welcome banner:
•
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
51
The banner is shown after the user
has signed in to the web interface or
the command line interface.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Add a welcome banner
About welcome banner
Adding a Welcome banner is only available using API commands;
we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
You can set up a welcome banner that
users see after they sign in to the video
system's web interface or command line
interface. The banner can have multiple
lines.
API commands
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set
This is a multiline command. Anything you input after you issue
the command, is input to the command (including line breaks).
Finish the input with a separate line containing just a period
ending with a line break.
The banner can for example contain
information you need in order to get
started, or things you must be aware of
when setting up the system.
There are also a few more welcome banner commands, refer to
the API-guide for more details.
The maximum size is: 4 kByte
This is a sign in banner
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get
Welcome banner versus sign in
banner
Sign in banner:
Example
•
xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set <enter>
This is a welcome banner. <enter>
Welcome banner:
A welcome banner may have multiple lines. <enter>
•
. <enter>
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
The banner is shown before the user
signs in to the web interface or the
command line interface.
52
The banner is shown after the user
has signed in to the web interface or
the command line interface.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage the service certificates of the video system
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security > Service
Certificates.
You need the following files:
•
Certificate (file format: .PEM)
•
Private key, either as a separate file or included in the same
file as the certificate (file format: .PEM format)
•
Passphrase (required only if the private key is encrypted)
The certificate and the private key will be stored in the same file
on the video system.
About the service
certificates of the video
system
Certificate validation may be required
when using TLS (Transport Layer
Security).
A server or client may require that the
video system presents a valid certificate
to them before communication can be
set up.
The video system’s certificates are text
files that verify the authenticity of the
system. These certificates may be issued
by a certificate authority (CA).
Enable or disable, view or
delete a certificate
Certificates are used for the following
services: HTTPS server, SIP, IEEE 802.1X
and audit logging.
Use the On and Off buttons to
enable or disable a certificate for
the different services.
You can store many certificates on the
video system, but only one certificate can
be enabled for each service at a time.
Use the corresponding button to
view or delete a certificate.
If authentication fails, the connection will
not be established.
Add a certificate
1. Browse to find the Certificate
file and Private key file (optional)
on your computer.
2. Fill in the Passphrase if required.
3. Click Add certificate... to store
the certificate on the video
system.
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
53
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage the list of trusted certificate authorities (CAs)
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate
Authorities, and open the Custom CAs tab.
You need the following file:
•
CA certificate list (file format: .PEM).
About trusted CAs
Certificate validation may be required
when using TLS (Transport Layer
Security).
The video system may be set up to
require that a server or client presents
its certificate to the video system before
communication can be set up.
The certificates are text files that verify
the authenticity of a server or client. The
certificates must be signed by a trusted
CA.
View or delete a certificate
In order to verify the signature of the
certificates, a list of trusted CAs must
reside on the video system.
Use the corresponding button to
view or delete a certificate.
The list must include all CAs needed in
order to verify certificates for both audit
logging and other connections.
Upload a list of
certificate authorities
1. Browse to find the file
containing a list of CA
certificates on your computer
(file format: .PEM).
2. Click Add certificate authority...
to store the new CA certificates
on the video system.
If authentication fails, the connection will
not be established.
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
Previously stored certificates are not deleted
automatically.
The entries in a new file with CA certificates
are appended to the existing list.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
54
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up secure audit logging
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Setup > Configuration.
The certificate authority (CA) that verifies the certificate
of the audit server must be in the video system’s list of
trusted certificate authorities. Otherwise, logs will not be
sent to the external server.
Refer to the ► Manage the list of trusted certificate
authorities (CAs) chapter how to update the list.
About secure audit logging
When audit logging is enabled, all sign in
activity and configuration changes on the
video system are recorded.
Use the Security > Audit > Logging >
Mode setting to enable audit logging.
Audit logging is disabled by default.
In ExternalSecure audit logging mode
the video system sends encrypted audit
logs to an external audit server (syslog
server), which identity must be verified by
a signed certificate.
1. Open the Security category.
2. Find the Audit > Server
settings, and enter the
Address of the audit server.
The signature of the audit server is
verified using the same CA list as other
servers/clients.
If you set PortAssignment to
Manual, you must also enter
a Port number for the audit
server.
If the audit server authentication fails, no
audit logs are sent to the external server.
3. Set Audit > Logging > Mode
to ExternalSecure.
4. Click Save for the change to
take effect.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
55
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage pre-installed certificates for CUCM via Expressway provisioning
About pre-installed
certificates
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security > Certificate
Authorities, and open the Preinstalled CAs tab.
The pre-installed certificates in this
list are only used when the video
system is provisioned by Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM) via
Expressway (Edge).
Only Cisco Expressway infrastructure
certificates are checked against this list.
If the validation of the Cisco Expressway
infrastructure certificate fails, the video
system will not be provisioned and
registered.
Factory resetting the video system
does not delete the list of pre-installed
certificates.
View or disable certificates
Use the Details... and Disable
buttons respectively, to view or
disable certificates.
The certificates and certificate issuers in the illustration are examples. Your system has other certificates.
As an alternative to using the pre-installed certificates, you
can append the certificates you need to the certificate list
manually.
Refer to the ► Manage the list of trusted certificate
authorities (CAs) chapter how to update the list of trusted
certificates.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
56
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Delete CUCM trust lists
The information in this chapter is only relevant for video systems
that are registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager
(CUCM).
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security >
CUCM Certificates.
More information about trust
lists
Delete the CUCM trust lists
For more information about CUCM and
trust lists, read the Deployment guide for
TelePresence endpoints on CUCM that is
available on the Cisco web site.
Click Delete CTL/ITL to remove the trust lists.
As a general rule, you should not delete old CTL
(Certificate Trust List) and ITL (Initial Trust List) files.
In these cases, you must still delete them:
•
When you change the CUCM IP address.
•
When you move the endpoint between CUCM
clusters.
•
When you need to re-generate or change the CUCM
certificate.
Overview of trust list fingerprints and certificates
The trust lists’ fingerprints and an overview of the certificates in
the lists are displayed on the web page.
This information may be useful for troubleshooting.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
57
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Change the persistency mode
Persistency mode
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Security >
Non-persistent Mode.
Check the persistency status
Change the persistency settings
The active radio buttons show the current persistency status of
the video system.
All persistency settings are set to Persistent by default. You only
have to change these settings if you want to make them Nonpersistent.
Alternatively, you can navigate to Setup > Status, and then open
the Security category to see the Persistency status.
1. Click the radio buttons to set the persistency for
configurations, call history, internal logging, local phonebook
(local directory and favorites) and IP connectivity (DHCP)
information.
2. Click Save and reboot....
The video system restarts automatically. After the restart, the
behavior changes according to the new persistency settings.
Logs, configurations, and other data that was stored
before you switched to Non-persistent mode, are NOT
cleared or deleted.
Configurations, call history, internal
logs, local phonebook (local directory
and favorites list), and IP connectivity
information are stored by default.
Because all persistency settings are set
to Persistent, a system restart does not
delete this information.
Generally, we recommend you NOT to
change the persistency settings. Only
change to Non-persistent mode if
you have to prevent users from being
able to see or traceback to any logged
information from the previous session
In Non-persistent mode, the following
information is lost or cleared each time
the system restarts:
•
System configuration changes
•
Information about placed and
reveived calls (call history)
•
Internal log files
•
Changes to the local contacts or
favorites list
•
All IP related information (DHCP) from
the last session
Information that was stored before
changing to Non-persistent mode
is not automatically cleared or
deleted. You must factory reset
the video system to delete such
information.
There is more information about
performing a factory reset in the
► Factory reset the video system
chapter.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
58
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set strong security mode
About strong security mode
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Security >
Strong Security Mode.
Use strong security mode only when
compliance with DoD JITC regulations is
required.
Strong security mode sets very strict
passphrase requirements, and requires all
users to change their passphrase on the
next sign in.
Set strong security mode
Read carefully about the consequences of strong
security mode before you continue.
1. If you want to use strong security mode, click
Enable Strong Security Mode.... and confirm
your choice in the dialog box that appears.
The video system restarts automatically.
2. Change the passphrase when you are
prompted. The new passphrase must meet the
strict criteria as described.
How to change the system passphrase is
described in the ► Change the system
passphrase chapter.
Return to normal mode
Click Disable Strong Security Mode... in order to
restore the video system to normal mode. Confirm
your choice in the dialog box that appears.
The video system restarts automatically.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
59
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 1 of 5)
Cisco Proximity allows users to see, control, capture and share
content directly on their own mobile devices (smartphone, tablet,
or laptop), when the device is near a video system.
The mobile device can automatically pair with the video system
when it comes within range of ultrasound transmitted by the video
system.
Proximity services
Place calls and control the video system:
•
•
Dial, mute, adjust volume, hang up
Available on laptops (OS X and Windows), smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)
View shared content on a mobile device:
•
•
View shared content, review previous slides, save selected slides
Available on smartphones and tablets (iOS and Android)
•
For DX70 and DX80, this service is available only when in a call
Wireless share from a laptop:
•
•
Share content without connecting a presentation cable
Available on laptops (OS X and Windows)
The number of simultaneous Proximity connections depends
on the type of video system. The client warns new users if the
maximum number of connections has been reached.
Video system
Room Kit, Room 55, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70, Room 70 G2
30 / 7
*
Codec Plus, Codec Pro
30 / 7
*
SX80
SX10, SX20
MX700, MX800
*
Maximum number of
connections
10
Place calls and control the video system
View shared content on a mobile device
7
10
MX200 G2, MX300 G2
7
DX70, DX80
3
30 connections when the View shared content on a mobile device Proximity
service is disabled; 7 connections when this service is enabled.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Wireless share from a mobile device
60
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 2 of 5)
Install a Cisco Proximity client
Where to find the clients
You can download the Cisco Proximity clients for smartphones
and tablets (Android and iOS), and laptops (Windows and OS X)
free of charge from ► https://proximity.cisco.com
Clients for smartphones and tablets are also available directly
through Google Play (Android) and Apple App Store (iOS).
End-user license agreement
Supported operating systems
•
iOS 7 and above
•
Android 4.0 and above
•
Mac OS X 10.9 and above
•
Windows 7 and above
The tile based interface introduced with Windows 8 is not
supported.
Read the end-user license agreement carefully,
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/general/warranty/
English/EU1KEN_.html
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
61
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 3 of 5)
Ultrasound emission
Cisco video systems emit ultrasound as part of the Proximity
feature.
Use the Proximity > Mode setting to switch the Proximity feature and thereby also ultrasound emission - On and Off.
Most people are exposed to ultrasound more or less daily in many
environments, including industry, commercial applications and
home appliances.
Even if airborne ultrasound may cause subjective effects for some
individuals, it is very unlikely that any effects will occur for levels
below 75 dB.
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room Kit, Room
Kit Plus, SX10N and MX Series:
•
The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a
distance of 50 cm or more from the loudspeaker.
DX70 and DX80:
•
The ultrasound sound pressure level is below 75 dB at a
distance of 20 cm or more from the loudspeaker.
Headsets
DX70, DX80, and SX10N:
You can always use a headset with these systems because:
•
DX70 and DX80 have dedicated headset outputs, on which we
never emit ultrasound.
•
SX10N plays ultrasound on the built-in loudspeakers.
Ultrasound is never emitted on the HDMI or audio outputs.
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room Kit, Room
Kit Plus, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, SX10, SX20, SX80, and MX
Series:
•
These systems are not designed for headset use.
•
We strongly recommend you to switch off ultrasound emission
if you use a headset with these video systems (set Proximity >
Mode to Off). Then you cannot use the Proximity feature.
•
Since these systems don’t have dedicated headset outputs,
we are not able to control the sound pressure level from the
connected headsets.
Codec Plus, Codec Pro, SX10, SX20, and SX80:
•
We cannot foresee the ultrasound sound pressure level on
these video systems, because they emit ultrasound on thirdparty loudspeakers.
The volume control on the loudspeaker itself, and the Audio >
Ultrasound > MaxVolume setting affect the ultrasound sound
pressure level; the volume control on the remote control or
Touch controller does not have any effect.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
62
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 4 of 5)
Enable Proximity services
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
Go to Proximity > Mode. Check that Proximity is On (default),
so that the video system sends ultrasound pairing messages.
The Proximity indicator
You can see the Proximity indicator on the screen as long
as at least one Proximity client is paired with the system.
The Proximity feature is switched On by
default.
The indicator doesn't disappear immediately when the last
client unpairs. It may take a few minutes.
When Proximity is switched On, the
video system transmits ultrasound pairing
messages.
Enable the services you want to allow. Only Wireless share
from a desktop client is enabled by default.
The ultrasound pairing messages are
received by nearby devices with Proximity
clients, and triggers the authentication
and authorization of the device.
In order to fully utilise the Proximity functionality, we
recommend that you enable all services.
Place calls and control the video system:
•
Go to Proximity > Services > CallControl and choose
Enabled.
Cisco recommends - for the best user
experience - that Proximity always is
switched On*.
View shared content on a mobile device:
•
Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > ToClients
and choose Enabled.
In order to get full access to Proximity,
the Proximity services (Proximity >
Services > ...) must be Enabled as well.
Wireless share from a desktop client:
•
About Proximity
Go to Proximity > Services > ContentShare > FromClients
and choose Enabled.
*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
63
We recommend not to use a headset, if you have
switched on Proximity (ultrasound).
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up Intelligent Proximity for content sharing (page 5 of 5)
Room considerations
Room acoustics
•
•
Rooms with hard surfaces may cause challenges due to
severe audio reflections. Acoustical treatment of meeting
rooms is always highly recommended for the best meeting
experience as well as Intelligent Proximity performance.
Cisco recommends only one video system with Intelligent
Proximity enabled in a room. Otherwise, interference is likely
to occur, which may lead to problems with device discovery
and session maintenance.
Additional resources
Audio artifacts
•
If you can hear audio artifacts, like humming or clipping
noise, decrease the maximum ultrasound volume (Audio >
Ultrasound > MaxVolume).
Cannot share content from a laptop
•
Cisco Proximity site:
► https://proximity.cisco.com
Support forum:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/proximitysupport
For content sharing to work, the video system and the laptop
must be on the same network. For this reason Proximity
sharing might fail if your video system is connected to
your company network via Expressway, and your laptop is
connected via VPN (VPN client dependent).
About privacy
In the Cisco Privacy statement and the Cisco Proximity
Supplement you find information about data collection in the
clients and privacy concerns that needs to be considered
when deploying this feature in the organization. Refer to:
► https://www.cisco.com/web/siteassets/legal/privacy.html
Basic troubleshooting
Cannot detect devices with Proximity clients
•
Some Windows laptops are not able to record sound in the
ultrasound frequency range (20 kHz-22 kHz). This can be due
to frequency limitations with the sound card, sound driver or
the internal microphone of the particular device. Refer to the
Support forum for more information.
•
Check Settings > Issues and diagnostics on the user interface,
or Maintenance > Diagnostics on the web interface of the
video system. If there are no ultrasound related Issues listed
("Unable to verify the ultrasound signal"), ultrasound pairing
messages are emitted by the video system as they should.
Refer to the Proximity Support forum for further assistance
with the client detection issues.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
64
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio
Video input quality settings
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off
between high resolution (sharpness) and high frame rate (motion).
1. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > Quality and set the video
quality parameter to Motion.
The Video Input Connector n Quality setting must be set to
Motion for the optimal definition settings to take any effect. With
the video input quality set to Sharpness, the endpoint will transmit
the highest resolution possible, regardless of frame rate.
2. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Profile and choose the preferred optimal definition profile.
3. Go to Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Threshold60fps to set the threshold below which the
maximum transmitted frame rate will be 30 fps.
Optimal definition profile
The optimal definition profile should reflect the lighting conditions
in the video conferencing room and the quality of the camera
(video input source). The better the lighting conditions and the
better the quality of the camera, the higher the profile should be
used.
Generally, the Medium profile is recommended. However, if the
lighting conditions are very good, we recommend that you test
the endpoint on the various Optimal Definition Profile settings
before deciding on a profile. The High profile may be set in order
to increase the resolution for a given call rate.
Some typical resolutions used for different optimal definition
profiles, call rates and transmit frame rates are shown in the
tables on the next page. The resolution and frame rate must be
supported by both the calling and called systems.
Threshold for sending video at 60 fps
Use the Video Input Connector n OptimalDefinition
Threshold60fps setting to decide when to allow sending video at
60 fps.
For all resolutions lower than this threshold, the maximum
transmitted frame rate will be 30 fps; for higher resolutions, 60 fps
is possible if the available bandwidth is adequate.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
65
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Introduction
Peripherals
Adjust the video quality to call rate ratio
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates
Call rate
[kbps]
128
H.264, maximum 30 fps
Normal
Medium
H.264, 60 fps allowed at 512×288 and higher resolutions
High
320×180@30
512×288@20
512×288@30
256
512×288@30
640×360@30
384
640×360@30
768×448@30
Normal
Medium
High
320×180@30
512×288@20
512×288@30
768×448@30
512×288@30
640×360@30
512×288@60
768×448@30
640×360@30
512×288@60
640×360@60
512
768x448@30
1024x576@30
1024x576@30
512x288@60
640x360@60
768x448@60
768
1024×576@30
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
640×360@60
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1152
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1472
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1024×576@60
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1920
1280x720@30
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1024x576@60
1280x720@60
1280x720@60
2560
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1280x720@60
1280x720@60
1920x1080@60
3072
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1280x720@60
1280x720@60
1920x1080@60
4000
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1280x720@60
1920x1080@60
1920x1080@60
6000
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
1920×1080@60
Resolutions and frame rate [w×h@fps] obtained for different optimal definition profiles and call rates
Call rate
[kbps]
H.265, maximum 30 fps
Normal
128
512×288@30
Medium
512×288@30
H.265, 60 fps allowed at 512×288 and higher resolutions
High
640×360@30
Normal
512×288@30
Medium
High
512×288@30
512×288@60
640×360@60
256
640×360@30
768×448@30
768×448@30
640×360@30
512×288@60
384
768×448@30
1024×576@30
1280×720@30
640×360@60
768×448@60
768×448@60
512
1024x576@30
1280x720@30
1280x720@30
640x360@60
768x448@60
1024x576@60
1280×720@60
768
1280×720@30
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
768×448@60
1024×576@60
1152
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1024×576@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1472
1280×720@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1920
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1280x720@60
1280x720@60
1280x720@60
2560
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1920x1080@30
1280x720@60
1280x720@60
1920x1080@60**
3072
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1920×1080@30
1280×720@60
1280×720@60
1920x1080@60**
*
The maximum bit rate for H.265 is 3 Mbps. If the bit rate is set higher the
codec uses H.264. In general, H.265 gives similar quality to H.264 at half the
bandwidth (call rate).
**
H.264
4000*
6000*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
66
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Configuration
Configuration
Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface
Branding in the awake state
We recommend that you use this feature
rather than our legacy Custom wallpaper
feature, which prevents the use of
functionality such as One Button to Push.
In the awake state you can:
Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen and Touch 10)
Add a short message (text only) in the bottom left corner (only
on screen, not on Touch 10)
(page 1 of 2)
The Branding feature, as describe in
this chapter, allows you to customize
the screen and Touch user interface
appearence without compromising the
overall Cisco user experience.
From this page you can add your own branding elements
(background brand image, logo, custom message) to the video
system.
•
Appendices
About Branding
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Personalization, and open the Branding tab.
•
System settings
You cannot use the Branding feature
and a Custom wallpaper at the same
time.
If your video system is set up with a
Custom wallpaper, you must click Disable
the custom wallpaper before adding
branding elements.
Custom text
Logo
We recommend:
•
A black logo (the video system will add a white overlay with 40% opacity
so that the logo and the other user interface elements go well together)
•
PNG-format with transparent background
•
Minimum 272×272 pixels (it will be scaled automatically)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
67
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
Add corporate branding to the screen and Touch 10 user interface
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Branding in the halfwake state
In halfwake state you can:
•
Add a background brand image (screen and
Touch 10)
•
Add a logo in the bottom right corner (screen
and Touch 10)
•
Customize or remove the message at the center
of the screen (only on screen, not on Touch 10).
This is the message that informs the user how to
start using the video system
Background brand image
In general, we recommend that you keep the
standard message. Change the message only if
you have to adapt it to a different scenario, for
example if you have a third party user interface.
•
When the video system wakes up, the
image is shown in full color; after a few
seconds the image is automatically dimmed
(transparent black overlay)
•
Image format: PNG or JPEG
•
Recommended size: 1920 × 1080 pixels
Logo
We recommend:
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
•
A white logo (so that it goes well with the dark
background brand image)
•
PNG-format with transparent background
•
Minimum 272×272 pixels
68
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Add a custom wallpaper
About a custom wallpaper
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Personalization, and open the Custom wallpaper tab.
If you want a custom picture as
background on your screen, you may
upload and use a custom wallpaper. A
custom wallpaper will not appear on the
Touch controller.
You can only store one custom wallpaper
on the video system at a time; a new
custom wallpaper overwrites the old one.
We recommend that you use our new
Branding feature rather than this legacy
Custom wallpaper feature. You will get a
better overall Cisco user experience, and
avoid loosing functionality such as One
Button To Push and meeting information.
See the ► Add corporate branding to
the screen and Touch 10 user interface
chapter.
You cannot use the Branding feature
and a Custom wallpaper at the same
time.
If your video system is set up with
branding elements you must click
Continue without branding before adding
a custom wallpaper.
Upload a custom wallpaper
Overwrites any old custom wallpaper.
1. Browse to find the custom wallpaper
image file.
2. Click Upload to save the file on the
video system.
Supported file formats: BMP, GIF,
JPEG, PNG
Maximum file size: 16 megapixels
Delete the custom wallpaper
Delete fully removes the custom
wallpaper from the video system.
You have to upload it anew if you
want use it again.
The custom wallpaper is automatically
activated once uploaded.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
69
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Choose a ringtone and set the ringtone volume
About ringtones
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Personalization, and open the Ringtones tab.
A set of ringtones are installed on the
video system. Use the web interface to
choose a ringtone, and set the ringtone
volume.
You can play back the choosen ringtone
from the web interface. Note that the
ringtone will be played back on the video
system itself, and not on the computer
running the web interface.
Change the ringtone
1. Choose a ringtone from the
drop-down list.
2. Click Save to make it the
active ringtone.
Play back the ringtone
Set the ringtone volume
Click the play button ( ► ) to
play back the ringtone.
Use the slide bar to adjust the
ringtone volume.
Use the stop button (  ) to
end the playback.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
70
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Manage the Favorites list
Manage Favorites using
the video system’s user
interface
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to
Setup > Favorites.
Import/Export contacts from file
Click Export to save the local contacts
in a file; and click Import to bring in
contacts from a file.
Add a contact in the Favorites list
1. Select Call on the home screen.
The current local contacts are
discarded when you import new
contacts from a file.
2. Select the contact you want to add.
3. Select Add to favorites.
The contact you add will be placed in the
top folder. You cannot select or create a
sub-folder.
Add or edit a contact
1. Click Add contact to make a new
local contact, or click a contact’s
name followed by Edit contact.
Remove a contact from the
Favorites list
2. Fill in or update the form that pops
up.
Choose a folder in the folder drop
down list in order to store the
contact in a sub-folder.
Click Add contact method and fill in
the new input fields if you want to
store more than one contact method
for the contact (for example video
address, telephone and mobile
number).
3. Click Save to store the local contact.
Delete a contact
1. Click a contacts name followed by
Edit contact.
1. Select Call on the home screen.
2. Select the Favorites tab.
Add or edit a sub-folder
1. Click Add folder to make a new sub-folder, or
click one of the listed sub-folders followed by
Edit folder to change an existing sub-folder.
3. Select the contact you want to
remove.
4. Select Remove favorite.
2. Fill in or update the form that pops up.
3. Click Save to create or update the folder.
Delete a sub-folder
1. Click a folder’s name followed by Edit folder.
2. Click Delete to remove the folder and all its
contacts and sub-folders. Confirm your choice
in the dialog that pops up.
2. Click Delete to remove the local
contact.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
71
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up accessibility features
Flashing screen for incoming calls
To make it easier for the hearing impaired users to notice when
someone is calling, the screen can be setup to flash red and gray
on incoming calls.
1. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
2. Go to UserInterface > Accessibility > IncomingCallNotification
and select AmplifiedVisuals.
3. Click Save.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
72
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 3
Peripherals
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
73
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect external monitors (page 1 of 3)
MX700 and MX800 Dual support one external screen, and MX800
Single supports two external screens, in addition to the integrated
screen(s).
MX700 and MX800 Dual
The video system distributes the layout on all available screens.
External screen
Always switch off power when you connect and
disconnect screens and other peripherals.
Remove the video system’s left side cover to get access to the
codec connector panel and power switch. The cover is fastened
with magnets.
Connector 3 (DVI-I)
Audio Line outputs
(Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
Do not disconnect the integrated screens from the codec,
and do not use those connectors for anything else.
The reason for this is that the integrated screen
connections make use of multichannel audio, which
drives the included speaker systems. Inserting third party
equipment is likely to break the audio chain, causing the
video system to fail from an audio perspective.
Codec connector panel
These connectors are used
for the integrated screens.
Do not disconnect!
MX800 Single
External screen
Connector 3 (DVI-I)
Audio Line outputs
(Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
Connector 2 (HDMI)
External screen
Codec connector panel
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
74
This connector is used for
the integrated screen.
Do not disconnect!
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect external monitors (page 2 of 3)
Automatic setup
There is no special configuration needed on the video system in
order to support dual monitors or triple monitors scenarios. By
default the number of monitors are auto-detected, and the role
of each monitor - whether it is intended to be the first, second,
or third monitor - is automatically set according to the physical
connections.
For example, if the total number of monitors are three, the following
settings will be assumed when set to Auto:
• Video > Monitors: Triple
• Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: First
• Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Second
When do you need manual setup
You can override the default behavior by setting one or more
settings manually. You need manual setup when you want to:
•
Dedicate a monitor to only show presentations
•
Use one of the outputs for a recorder
•
Replicate the same layout on more than one monitor
•
Show the on-screen messages and indicators (OSD) on
another monitor than the video output with the lowest number
•
Set the resolution manually, e.g. if the video system fails to
detect the native resolution and refresh rate of a monitor
• Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Third
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
75
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect external monitors (page 3 of 3)
Manual setup
About the number of
monitors and the role of
each monitor
The automatic setup works well for common single monitor,
dual monitors, and triple monitors scenarios. For more complex
scenarios, you may need manual configuration.
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration,
to find the settings referred below.
Set a role for each
monitor
Set the number of
monitors
Define a role for each monitor
with the Video > Output >
Connector n > MonitorRole
setting.
Set the number of monitors
with different layouts in
your setup with the Video >
Monitors setting.
Choose monitor roles that
match your monitor setup.
When set to Auto, the video
system automatically detects
if a monitor is connected to a
connector, and thereby also
determines the number of
monitors in the setup.
Choose on which
monitor to display
messages and indicators
Set the monitor
resolution and refresh
rate
Define on which monitor to
display the messages and
indicators on-screen with the
UserInterface > OSD > Output
setting.
The video system reads the
native resolution of a monitor
and outputs this if possible.
Typically, this gives the best
possible picture for the
monitor.
When set to Auto, the video
system determines which
monitor to use based on the
number of the connector.
The other options allow you
to fix a single, dual, or triple
monitor setup; and to dedicate
one monitor for presentations.
Example 1:
Three monitors in total, and the third monitor is dedicated to only
show presentations:
If auto-detection of resolution
and refresh rate fails, you must
set the resolution manually
with the Video > Output >
Connector n > Resolution
setting.
Monitors with the same monitor role get
the same layout; monitors with different
monitor roles get different layouts.
The Video > Monitors setting must reflect
the number of different layouts in your
room setup.
Most often the number of different
layouts are the same as the number
of physical monitors, but not always. If
exactly the same layout shall be repeated
on two or more monitors, the number of
different layouts is less.
Note that a monitor can be reserved for
presentations.
Example 2:
Two monitors in total, and a recording device is attached to
Connector 3 (DVI). OSD is on the monitor on Connector 2:
•
Video > Monitors: TriplePresentationOnly
•
Video > Monitors: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 1 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 2 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Auto
•
Video > Output > Connector 3 > MonitorRole: Recorder
•
UserInterface > OSD > Output: 1
•
UserInterface > OSD > Output: 2
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
The Video > Output > Connector n >
MonitorRole setting assigns a role to the
monitor that is connected to the output.
The monitor role decide which layout (call
participants and presentation) will appear
on the monitor.
76
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
•
Three for single
camera systems
•
Two for dual camera
systems
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect input sources
You can connect several
external input sources
to the video system
simultaneously:
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
About the video inputs
Audio Line input
(Euroblock, 3.5 mm)
C
Connector 5
(S-Video/Composite)
Y
Connector 3 (HDMI)
Connector 2 (HDMI)
Connector 1 (HDMI)
Do not disconnect!
Used for the integrated
cameras in a dual
camera system.
Do not disconnect!
Used for the integrated
camera in a single
camera system.
Connect a computer
An external camera is typically connected to an HDMI input.
Connect a computer to a video input in order to share content
locally or with conference participants. The codec supports two
computers simultaneously.
Note about the DVI-I port and camera control
Two HDMI inputs (video systems with
a single camera) / One HDMI input
(video systems with a dual camera)
•
One DVI-I input
•
One combined S-video/Composite
video input
Typically, the inputs are used for
computers, but you can also connect
cameras or other types of video and
content sources.
Analog video input
Connector 5 comprises two BNC
sockets, and is used for S-Video or
Composite video signals.
S-Video: Connect to both the Y and C
connectors.
Connect a camera
In addition, you must connect the camera via an Ethernet switch
to the video system’s Ethernet 2 or Ethernet 3 port; or to the
camera control DSUB-9 port. The type of camera determines
whether to use Ethernet or DSUB-9.
•
Connector 4 (DVI-I)
Sign in to the web
interface and navigate to
Setup > Configuration, to
find the settings referred
in this section.
Remove the video
system’s left side cover
to get access to the
connectors. The cover is
fastened with magnets.
MX700 and MX800 has several input
connectors. The following inputs are
available for additional content sources:
Typically, computers are connected to Connector 3 (HDMI) or
Connector 4 (DVI-I).
To get audio when using DVI-I, you must also connect the
computer to one of the codec’s Audio Line inputs (Euroblock).
Composite: Connect to the Y connector.
DVI-I and Analog video input
The DVI-I and combined S-Video/
Composite video inputs cannot be used
simultaneously.
If you connect a camera to the DVI-I input, the video system
need to know the camera's serial number to be able to control it
(because EDID information is not passed on from the camera to
the video system). Use the following setting:
Cameras > Camera n > AssignedSerialNumber
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
77
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Connect input sources
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Set type and name for an input source
About video and content quality
We recommend that you set type and name for an input source:
Use the Video > Input > Connector n > Quality setting to optimize
quality with respect to motion or sharpness.
•
Video > Input > Connector n > InputSourceType
•
Video > Input > Connector n > Name
These settings determine the names and icons that are shown
on the user interfaces. Intuitive names and icons make source
selection easier.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Typically, you should choose Motion when a large number of
participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the
picture. Choose Sharpness when you want the highest quality of
detailed images and graphics.
The default value is Motion for Connector 1, 2 and 5; and
Sharpness for Connector 3 and 4.
78
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Extend the number of input sources
You can customize our touch user interfaces to include input
sources that are connected to a third-party external video switch.
The sources will appear and behave as any other video source
that is connected directly to the video system.
Architecture
You need a Cisco video system with a touch interface, a thirdparty control system, for example Crestron or AMX, and a thirdparty video switch. It is the control system, not the video system,
that controls the video switch.
When you program the control system you must use the video
system’s API (events and commands)* in order to connect with the
video switch and the controls on the touch interface. This way you
can synchronize what is shown and done on the user interface
with the actual state of the input sources.
Touch
interface
PC
Video system
Apple TV
Third-party
video switch
API
Control
system
Chromecast
Other...
User interface with multiple external input sources (example)
Consult the Customization guide for full details about how to
extend the user interface, and how to use the video system’s API
to set it up. Go to:
*
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
79
You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL,
INTEGRATOR, or ADMIN user roles in order to
access the API commands that you need when
programming the control system.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration,
to find the settings referred.
Configure speaker tracking
The speaker track feature uses automatic camera framing to
select the best view based on how many people are in the room.
Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode
When closeup is enabled and a person in the room speaks, the
system will find the person and select the best camera framing.
The closeup may not include all the persons in the room. If you
want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times
you can turn off the closeup functionality.
Best overview
The camera uses digital face detection to automatically create
the best view of a single person or a group of people in the
conference room. If people are moving around in the room or
additional participants enters the conference room, the feature
will adopt to the changes and automatically adjust the view to
include all persons in the picture. This feature works together
with speaker tracking to provide the best possible conferencing
experience.
Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack settings to configure speaker
tracking.
Products that support
speaker tracking
The following Cisco products support
speaker tracking:
Auto: Speaker tracking is enabled in general. The system will
detect people in the room and automatically select the best
camera framing. Users can switch speaker track on or off
instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller.
•
MX700 and MX800 with dual camera
•
SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera
or Quad camera
•
Room Kit
Off: Speaker tracking is switched off. The speaker track on/off
button will disappear from the Touch controller. The closeup
function and the tracking mode will be disabled.
•
Codec Plus with Quad Camera (Room
Kit Plus)
•
Codec Pro with Quad Camera (Room
Kit Pro)
Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Closeup
•
This setting only applies when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
is set to Auto
Codec Pro with SpeakerTrack 60
camera
•
Room 55
•
Room 55 Dual
•
Room 70
•
Room 70 G2
Auto: The system will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The system will keep all the persons in the room in the
camera framing at all times.
Tracking mode
The tracking mode defines how fast the camera view switch to a
new speaker when the tracking algorithm detects a change.
Use the Cameras > SpeakerTrack > TrackingMode setting to
select between the two modes.
Auto: This is the default setting.
Conservative: The system reacts slower to detected changes,
and the camera view will switch to a new speaker later.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
80
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the SpeakerTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Settings that are overidden by the speaker
track functionality
Applies only to video systems with a dual camera.
These settings are changed automatically when speaker tracking
is on:
•
Video > Input > Connector n > Quality
These settings are always forced to Motion for the connectors
where the dual cameras are connected. If both settings are
already set to Motion, there is no change.
•
Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition >
Threshold60fps
These settings will stay untouched if they are already equal
for the connectors where the dual cameras are connected.
If they are not equal the lowest threshold among the two is
preferred.
•
Video > Input > Connector n > OptimalDefinition > Profile
These settings will stay untouched if they are already equal for
the connectors where the dual cameras are connected. If they
are not equal the preferred setting is the first value in the list,
(Normal, Medium, High) that one of the two settings has.
The settings above are reset to the value they used to have,
as soon as you turn off speaker tracking. This is regardless of
whether you have used the user interface or the Cameras >
SpeakerTrack > Mode setting to turn off speaker tracking.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
81
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 1 of 3)
The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker
tracking functionality, thus you need a camera that
supports SpeakerTrack:
•
MX700 and MX800 with dual camera
•
SX80 with SpeakerTrack 60 camera or Quad camera
•
Room Kit
•
Room Kit Plus (Codec Plus and Quad Camera)
•
Room Kit Pro (Codec Pro and Quad Camera)
•
Room 55
•
Room 55 Dual
•
Room 70
•
Room 70 G2
Preparations
Whiteboard position
Speaker track camera
Accurate distance (d)
between camera
and whiteboard
d
With the Snap to Whiteboard extension, the camera
captures both the person and the whiteboard when a
person next to the whiteboard is speaking.
W
Speaker position
W
Sound
tracking
area
Whiteboard
The whiteboard must be placed across the room from
the camera, as shown in the illustration.
The Sound tracking area is from half the whiteboard
and up.
When configuring the feature, you need to know
the accurate distance between the camera and the
whiteboard.
Thus, the person presenting on the whiteboard must
stand upright next to the whiteboard. He or she
cannot move about in the room.
Without the Snap to Whiteboard extension, the camera
captures only the person.
W
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
82
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 2 of 3)
Troubleshooting
The Snap to Whiteboard wizard is only available when:
•
Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Mode is Auto.
Define the whiteboard area
Use the wizard on the Touch controller to define the whiteboard
area.
1. Tap the contact information in the upper left corner of the
Touch controller and open the Settings menu.
4. Follow the instructions in the wizard - use the back button
to move to
if you want to redo a step, and the next button
the next step:
•
2. Tap Snap to Whiteboard.
Move the slider to set the distance between the camera
and the whiteboard. It is important that the distance is
measured accurately.
Sign in with ADMIN credentials if the Settings menu is
passphrase protected on your video system.
3. Tap Configure or Reconfigure to start the wizard (depends
whether you configure the feature for the first time or not).
•
If the camera does not move to the
whiteboard position when the person
who is speaking stands next to the
whiteboard, check the following and redo
the required steps in the wizard:
•
Check that the whiteboard is placed
across the room from the camera.
•
Check that the distance between the
camera and whiteboard is measured
accurately.
•
The person who is speaking must be
close to the whiteboard. Furthermore,
the person must stand upright so that
the sound comes from the upper half
of the whiteboard area.
Adjust the camera view (pan, tilt, zoom) to frame the
whiteboard. Leave some space on both sides for the
person that will be speaking.
W
•
Fine tune both cameras (pan, tilt, zoom) to show the same
view.
•
Stand next to the whiteboard and start speaking.
If the camera zooms to the view that you have chosen for
the whiteboard, the feature is correctly set up, and ready
to use. If not, see the troubleshooting notes to the right.
•
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Tap
to close the wizard, and
panel.
83
to close the Settings
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Set up the Snap to Whiteboard feature (page 3 of 3)
Enable and disable Snap to Whiteboard
You can enable or disable the Snap to Whiteboard feature from
the Settings menu on the Touch controller or from the web
interface.
If the Settings menu on the Touch controller is open (not
protected by the ADMIN passphrase), any user can switch
the feature On and Off during a meeting or between
meetings. Moreover, any user can reconfigure the feature.
How to switch on speaker
tracking
From the Touch controller
1. Tap the contact information in the upper left corner of the
Touch controller and open the Settings menu.
2. Tap Snap to Whiteboard.
Sign in with ADMIN credentials if the Settings menu is
protected by a passphrase on your video system.
3. Set the toggle switch to:
Speaker tracking, which can be switched
on and off by the user at any time,
must be switched on for the Snap to
Whiteboard extension to work.
Tap the camera icon in the status bar of
the Touch controller, and use the toggle
button to switch speaker tracking on and
off.
Enabled: Snap to Whiteboard is enabled, and the
camera will capture both the person that speaks and the
whiteboard he or she is standing next to.
W
W
Disabled: Snap to Whiteboard is disabled, and the camera
will capture only the person that speaks.
From the web interface
1. Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
Camera view when Snap to
Whiteboard is enabled
Camera view when Snap to
Whiteboard is disabled
2. Find the Cameras > SpeakerTrack > Whiteboard > Mode
setting.
On: Snap to Whiteboard is enabled, and the camera will
capture both the person that speaks and the whiteboard
he or she is standing next to.
Off: Snap to Whiteboard is disabled, and the camera will
capture only the person that speaks.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
84
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
The PresenterTrack feature enables the camera to follow
the presenter, while the presenter moves about on stage.
When the presenter leaves the stage the tracking stops.
A system administrator must define the stage area and
the trigger zone. We recommend you to be in the room
while setting up PresenterTrack.
Prerequisites
Maintenance
Codec Plus with Precision 60 camera
•
Room 70 with Precision 60 as external camera
•
Codec Pro with Precision 60 camera or SpeakerTrack
60 camera
•
Room 70 G2 with Precision 60 as external camera
•
MX700 or MX800 with single or dual camera
•
SX80 with Precision 60 camera or SpeakerTrack 60
camera
Appendices
(page 1 of 5)
Plan the room and the stage area
Plan the trigger zone
Consider where to place the camera, that is used for
presenter tracking, to obtain an optimal user experience.
The trigger zone is the area where presenter tracking
is triggered. The trigger zone must cover an area that
enables the detection of a presenter's face.
Allow the audience or meeting participants to move
naturally in the room, without being tracked unintended.
The stage area is the zoomed-out overview image. Make
it large enough so the presenter can move about on stage.
When the presenter leaves the stage area the tracking stops.
The PresenterTrack is supported with:
•
System settings
Choose a location where the presenter(s) naturally will
enter the stage, for example by the speakers podium
or presenters desk. The trigger zone is not visible for
person(s) coming up on stage, so make it easy for the
person to be detected.
To avoid false face detection, make sure the background
of the trigger zone is neutral. Avoid having the trigger zone
in front of a monitor.
Stage area
Trigger zone
PresenterTrack feature
•
Supports two persons in the cropped image.
•
Can be used in combination with Briefing Room
mode.
•
You can use one of the SpeakerTrack 60 cameras for
PresenterTrack.
•
The camera uses digital pan, tilt and zoom, so it will
not move physically.
•
PresenterTrack and SpeakerTrack cannot be used
simultaneously. When you activate PresenterTrack,
SpeakerTrack is disabled, and vice versa.
The exception is when using the Briefing Room setup – both are active simultaneously in Q&A mode
(when someone in the local audience asks a question,
while the system is in Local Presenter mode).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
85
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
(page 2 of 5)
Step 1: Position the cameraSign in to the web
Tip
interface:
•
We recommend that you are in
the room when you configure the
PresenterTrack feature.
•
Use the Touch controller to adjust the
camera (zoom, pan, tilt) to define the
stage area.
•
Use the video system's web interface
to define the trigger zone. At the
same time, watch the screen of the
video system to see the result.
•
Activate the PresenterTrack feature
from the camera panel on the Touch
controller.
1. Navigate to Setup > Presenter Tracking.
2. Check the Enable PresenterTrack check box.
3. Click Configure... to open the configuration page.
When you click the Configure... button on the video
system's web interface, this will happen:
•
Standby is deactivated.
•
Full screen self-view is enabled.
•
The trigger zone rectangle is shown on screen.
•
If already active, the PresenterTrack feature is
deactivated.
Note that if you leave this web page at this stage,
without doing any changes, the trigger zone rectangle
is still visible on the video system's screen.
•
If you are not in the room: Click the Done button to
remove the trigger zone rectangle on the screen.
•
If you are in the room: Tap the Camera icon on the
Touch controller and choose a camera position
from the list.
Appendices
Stage area: The zoomed out overview
image. Make it large enough so that
the presenter can move around. When
the presenter leaves the stage area
the tracking stops.
4. Choose a camera from the Camera source drop down list.
A Precision 60 or SpeakerTrack 60 camera is required to
enable the PresenterTrack feature. If the camera does not
meet the requirements you will see a notification. Define
the stage area. Use the Touch controller to adjust the full
screen self-view (zoom, pan, tilt) if necessary. The camera
must cover the stage area that is used by a presenter.
When the presenter leaves the stage the camera will stop
following the presenter.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
86
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 3 of 5)
Step 2: Set the trigger zone
A polygonal trigger zone
The trigger zone defines the area where
presenter tracking is triggered.
You can set up a rectangular trigger zone
from the Presenter Tracking web page.
You cannot see the video from the room
in the web interface. An empty gray area
represents the camera view and a dashed
rectangle represents the trigger zone. Watch
the video system screen to see the video
from the room, together with the same
dashed rectangle as you see in the web
interface.
•
•
Adjust the size and location of the trigger
zone to cover a suitable area to detect
a presenter's face. The change you do
on the video system's web interface is
reflected on the video system screen.
If you want to define a polygonal trigger
zone, you must go to the Setup >
Configuration page, and find the
Cameras > PresenterTrack > TriggerZone
setting.
Trigger zone
The value of this setting is a string
composed of the coordinate pairs of the
vertices of the polygon.
Example:
Define the following trigger zone, which
has 12 vertices.
Video system screen: See the video from the room when you set the trigger zone.
The trigger zone must be large enough
to detect a presenter face. Have in mind
that people are of different heights.
0
Click Save.
0
500
1000
1500
1920
500
Stage area
The zoomed out overview image of the
room is represented by a blank box in
the video system's web interface.
1080
The coordinates of the vertices are:
Trigger zone
The dashed rectangle can be moved
around and re-sized. You can see the
same rectangle on the endpoint screen
when you define the trigger zone.
(300,100)
(1700,100)
(1700,700)
(1100,700)
(1100,600)
(1300,600)
(1300,300)
(700,300)
(700,600)
(900,600)
(900,700)
(300,700)
The corresponding setting value is:
Cameras > PresenterTrack > TriggerZone:
300,100,1700,100,1700,700,1100,700,
1100,600,1300,600,1300,300,700,300,
700,600,900,600,900,700,300,700
Web interface: Set the trigger zone.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
87
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 4 of 5)
Step 3: Test PresenterTrack in action
User scenarios
Activate PresenterTrack.
We do not support tracking of more than
one person, but sometimes more than
one person is in the cropped image.
1. Tap the Camera icon in the upper right corner of the Touch
controller.
2. Select Presenter from the list of camera positions to activate
presenter tracking.
3. The camera is now ready for presenter tracking, and you can
test the feature:
a. Position yourself in the trigger zone.
b. When you are detected the camera zooms in on you.
Walk back and forth on stage and check that the camera
follows you.
a. Position yourself in the trigger zone.
When multiple faces are in the cropped
image, the faces will be tracked as long
as they all move in the same direction.
If they move in different directions the
tracking stops and the image zooms out
and show the stage area. To start the
presenter tracking again, the presenter
must go to the trigger zone to be
detected.
Scenario 1: A person is interviewed by
another. They are both followed by the
camera as long as they stand still or move
in the same direction.
c. Leave the stage area to stop presenter tracking.
If necessary, go back to Step 1 or Step 2 to adjust the size of the
stage area or the trigger zone.
Scenario 2: When a presenter is replaced
by another the tracking stops. The new
presenter must move into the trigger zone
to be detected by the camera.
b. The camera zooms in on the presenter.
If you need to disable, and thereafter
enable, presenter tracking in a controlled
manner this can be done on the Touch
controller.
1. Tap the Camera icon in the status bar.
2. Deselect Presenter from the list
of camera positions to disable
PresenterTrack, and select Presenter
again to enable the feature.
c. Leave the stage to stop presenter tracking.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
88
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Set up the PresenterTrack feature
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 5 of 5)
Diagnostics mode
In order to troubleshoot you can set the video system in
PresenterTrack diagnostics mode.
•
The green square
indicates the at face is
tracked.
Sign in to the xAPI and run the following command.
xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack Set Mode: Diagnostic
The blue square indicates
the at face is detected but
not tracked.
In diagnostics mode the video system screen shows the stage
area (the zoomed out overview image), and the indicators:
RED: The trigger zone.
The red rectangle is
the trigger zone.
YELLOW: The cropped image that shows a zoomed in view of
the presenter.
GREEN: A face is detected and it is tracked.
GREEN BLINKING, FILLED: Indicates a positive face detection.
If the tracked individual does not get a valid face-read the
square will become red.
RED BLINKING, FILLED: Indicates a false face detection. After
some seconds the tracking will stop.
BLUE: A face is detected but the face is not tracked.
The yellow rectangle is the cropped
image that follows the presenter. The
yellow rectangle is not visible until a
person steps into the trigger zone and is
being tracked.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
89
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Briefing room set-up (page 1 of 6)
The Briefing room set-up makes it easy to set up,
manage, and use a room to deliver training and
education sessions to groups of people.
Classroom versus Briefing
Room set-up
The Briefing room set-up has the following
predefined room modes that accommodate
different scenarios::
The Classroom set-up is more flexible
than the Briefing room set-up in the
number of screens and how the layout
is distributed on the screens. Also, more
products support Classroom.
•
Local Presenter (the presenter is in the room)
•
Remote Presenter (the presenter is calling in)
•
Discussions (for discussions between
different sites, and with a local presenter in
the room)
Audience
camera
Presenter
camera
Classroom
The Briefing room set-up is available as a room
type template. When you set up a room using
a template, a set of configurations is pushed
automatically to the video system. It is important
that the room is set up correctly, and that the
cameras and screens are connected exactly as
specified. Otherwise the configurations will not
match the room.
Presentation
display
Remote
presenter
display
Remote
audience
display
Required equipment
•
SX80, Codec Pro
•
MX700, MX800
•
Room 70 G2
•
Three displays (Presentation display, Remote
presenter display, and Remote audience
display)
•
Two cameras (Audience camera and
Presenter camera)
•
Microphones
•
Speakers
•
Touch 10 controller
Briefing room set-up *
*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Supported products: Codec Plus,
Codec Pro, SX80, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, MX700, and
MX800
•
You can use any number of screens
that the video system supports,
typically two or three. Use the video
monitor settings to configure the
distribution of layouts on the screens,
if the default behavior does not fulfill
your requirements.
Briefing room
One of the following video systems:
•
•
•
Supported products: Codec Pro,
SX80, Room 70 G2, MX700, and
MX800
•
The set-up requires three screens,
and the layouts on the screens are
preconfigured (and fixed) to match
that particular scenario.
The illustration shows a codec with Speaker Track 60 camera as audience camera. The same
principle applies also to the supported integrated systems, and other supported codec and camera
combinations.
90
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Briefing room set-up
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 6)
Room modes*
Local Presenter mode
Remote Presenter mode
Discussion mode
The presenter is in the room. This mode also covers the
case when someone in the local audience asks a question
(Q&A).
The presenter is calling in.
For discussions between different sites. A local presenter
is in the room.
If automatic switching is enabled (default), the video
system switches to this mode when the Presenter camera
detects a presenter in the room.
If automatic switching is enabled (default), the video
system switches to this mode when the Presenter camera
doesn't detect a presenter in the room.
Local Presenter mode
Video sent to the far end
Sends video from the Presenter camera
Always use the Touch controller to activate this mode.
Remote Presenter mode
Discussion mode
Sends video from the Audience camera
Sends video from the Audience camera
Q&A: Sends split-screen video from the Presenter
camera and the person asking the question
(Audience camera)
Remote presenter display
Shows the presentation
Shows the presenter that is calling in, and other
remote sites (you can decide the layout locally)
Shows the remote sites that are part of the
discussion (you can decide the layout locally)
Presentation display
Shows the presentation
Shows the presentation
Shows the presentation
Remote audience display
Shows the remote participants that are calling in
from different sites
Shows the presentation
Shows the presentation
If there is no presentation, nothing will be shown on the corresponding screens (gray).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
*
91
The illustrations show a codec with Speaker Track 60 camera as audience camera. The same principle
applies also to the supported integrated systems, and other supported codec and camera combinations.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 3 of 6)
Room arrangement examples
These illustrations show examples of how to arrange
screens, cameras and microphones, and where to
place people for the best experience.
Recommendation
Presentation
display
Remote
presenter
display
Remote
presenter
display
•
Remote presenter display: 1st screen, placed
at front. For integrated systems, this is its (left)
screen.
Audience camera
•
Presentation display: 2nd screen, placed at front.
For integrated systems with two screens, this is
its right screen.
Remote audience display
•
•
Microphones
Audience camera: Use the integrated camera for
video systems that have that. For other systems,
we recommend the Cisco Quad Camera or Cisco
TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera. We
recommend a camera with speaker tracking, but it
is also possible to use a camera without speaker
tracking capabilities.
Presenter camera: Cisco TelePresence Precision
60 with presenter tracking enabled.
•
Microphones: We recommend the Cisco
TelePresence Ceiling Microphone for good
coverage of the room. Also other microphone
solutions can be used.
•
Speakers: Use the integrated speakers for video
systems that have that. For other systems, we
recommend good quality stereo speakers placed
next to the Presentation display at the front of the
room.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Audience camera
(single or dual)
Presenter camera
Remote audience display: 3rd screen, placed on
the side or at the back, so that the local presenter
can see the remote audience.
•
Presentation
display
Microphones
Presenter camera
Remote audience display
92
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 4 of 6)
Connect cables
Connect the cameras to the video
system as shown in the illustration.
Following the illustration ensures
that the configurations that are
automatically pushed to the video
system when selecting the Briefing
room type template, match your
actual set-up.
Keep all preconnected cables,
including the cables for the
integrated camera and screens,
as delivered from the factory. You
only have to connect the external
screens and cameras.
If the video system has a single camera, then the
integrated camera (which is the Audience camera)
uses only one HDMI input.
Presenter
camera
Remote Audience Display
Presentation Display
(MX700, MX800D: right integrated screen
Audience
camera
(integrated
single
camera)
Remote Presenter Display
(MX800: integrated screen
MX700, MX800D: left integrated screen)
Ethernet switch
Computer
*
Presenter
Camera
Microphones,
max 8
Audience camera
(integrated
dual camera)
To PoE injector
Network (LAN)
Ethernet switch *
*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
93
Since this set-up has more than two peripherals that need an
Ethernet connection to the codec, you need an Ethernet switch.
Do not connect the switch to Network port 1, which is reserved
for the LAN connection.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
Switching between room modes
We recommend you to be in the same room when setting
up the Briefing room. Otherwise you are not able to set up
PresenterTrack properly.
Switching between room modes (Local Presenter,
Remote Presenter, Discussions), which implies that
camera input sources, and remote and local screen
layouts, are changed, can be done in two ways:
1. Connect cameras and screens as described on the previous
page.
•
2. Use the Touch controller to stop sharing the video from the
Presenter camera. It is important that video from the Presenter
camera is not displayed on any screen while setting up
Briefing room.
4. Go to the Video > Input > Connector 3 section, and set the
following:
•
PresentationSelection: Manual
•
Quality: Motion
•
Visibility: Never
•
CameraControl Mode: On
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
5. Set up PresenterTrack for the Presenter camera, see the ►Set
up the PresenterTrack feature chapter.
This feature enables the camera to follow a presenter that is
moving about on stage.
6. Navigate to Setup > Configuration. Go to the Cameras >
PresenterTrack > PresenterDetectedStatus and choose
whether to enable (default) or disable automatic switching
between Local Presenter and Remote Presenter modes.
Automatically, based on who is speaking and
whether a local presenter is present on stage.
Automatic switching is only between the Local
Presenter and Remote Presenter modes. The
room mode doesn't change automatically if the
current mode is Discussion.
3. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
InputSourceType: camera
Appendices
(page 5 of 6)
Configure the video system
•
System settings
Switch between room modes manually
While in a conference, you can switch to another
mode using the Touch controller.
1. Tap Briefing Room on the Touch controller.
2. Tap the mode you want to change to: Local
Presenter, Remote Presenter, or Discussion. The
current mode is highlighted.
Automatic swtiching is supported only when
the PresenterTrack feature enabled (Cameras >
PresenterTrack > Enabled set to True).
•
Manually, using the buttons on the Touch
controller.
Automatic switching implies:
•
The system switches to the Local Presenter mode
when a person is detected in the PresenterTrack
trigger zone.
•
The system switches to the Remote Presenter
mode when the local presenter, who is tracked,
leaves the stage.
•
If someone in the local audience asks a question
when the system is in Local Presenter mode, the
system sends split-screen video showing both
the presenter and the person asking the question.
This requires a SpeakerTrack 60 or Quad Camera
as Audience camera, and that speaker tracking is
switched on.
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
7. Navigate to Setup > Room Types in the web interface, and
click the Briefing thumbnail to push the corresponding
configuration to the video system.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
94
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Briefing room set-up
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 6 of 6)
Limitations
Not supported functionality when using Briefing Room:
•
MultiSite (embedded multipoint switch)
•
H.265 video encoding
•
Content sharing to Proximity clients
•
Directional audio
•
Snap to Whiteboard
•
Active control (selection of layouts from CMS)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
95
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 1 of 5)
The Classroom set-up makes it easy to set up, manage, and use
a room to deliver training and education sessions to groups of
people.
The Classroom set-up is available as a room type template. When
you set up a room using a template, a set of configurations is
pushed automatically to the video system. It is important that the
room is set up correctly, and that the cameras are connected
exactly as specified. Otherwise the configurations will not match
the room.
Room modes
The Classroom set-up has the following predefined room modes
that accommodate different scenarios: Local Presenter, Remote
Presenter, and Discussion.
Local Presenter mode
•
The presenter is in the room. This mode also covers the case
when someone in the local audience asks a question (Q&A).
•
If automatic switching is enabled (default), the video system
switches to this mode when the Presenter camera detects a
presenter in the room.
Required equipment
•
One of the following video systems:
•
SX80, Codec Pro, Codec Plus
•
MX700, MX800
•
Room 55 Dual
•
Room 70
•
Room 70 G2
•
One or more screens (configurable)
•
Two cameras (Audience camera and Presenter camera)
•
Microphones
•
Speakers
•
Touch 10 controller
•
Sends video from the Presenter camera to the far end. In
the Q&A case: Sends split-screen video from the Presenter
camera and the person asking the question (Audience
camera) to the far end.
Classroom versus Briefing
Room set-up
The Classroom set-up is more flexible
than the Briefing room set-up in the
number of screens and how the layout
is distributed on the screens. Also, more
products support Classroom.
Classroom
•
Supported products: Codec Plus,
Codec Pro, SX80, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, MX700, and
MX800
•
You can use any number of screens
that the video system supports,
typically two or three. Use the video
monitor settings to configure the
distribution of layouts on the screens,
if the default behavior does not fulfill
your requirements.
Remote Presenter mode
•
The presenter is calling in.
•
If automatic switching is enabled (default), the video system
switches to this mode when the Presenter camera doesn't
detect a presenter in the room.
•
Sends video from the Audience camera to the far end.
Briefing room
•
Supported products: Codec Pro,
SX80, Room 70 G2, MX700, and
MX800
•
The set-up requires three screens,
and the layouts on the screens are
preconfigured (and fixed) to match
that particular scenario.
Discussion mode
Limitations
•
For discussions between different sites. A local presenter is in
the room.
Not supported functionality when using Classroom:
•
Always use the Touch 10 controller to activate this mode.
•
Sends video from the Audience camera to the far end.
•
MultiSite (embedded multipoint switch)
•
H.265 video encoding
•
Content sharing to Proximity clients
•
Directional audio
•
Snap to Whiteboard
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
96
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 2 of 5)
Room arrangement examples
These illustrations show examples of how to arrange screens,
cameras and microphones, and where to place people for the
best experience.
Main screen
Recommendation
Use the integrated camera for video systems that have
that. For other systems, we recommend the Cisco Quad
Camera or Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
We recommend a camera with speaker tracking, but it is
also possible to use a camera without speaker tracking
capabilities.
Presenter
camera
Microphones
Presenter camera:
•
Microphones
Presenter
camera
Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 with presenter tracking
enabled.
Second
screen
Microphones:
•
Audience
camera
Second
screen
Audience camera:
•
Main screen
Audience
camera
We recommend the Cisco TelePresence Ceiling Microphone for
good coverage of the room. Also other microphone solutions
can be used.
Speakers:
•
Use the integrated speakers for video systems that have
that. For other systems, we recommend good quality stereo
speakers placed next to the main screen at the front of the
room.
Screens:
•
You can use one or more screens (the maximum number of
screens depends on your type of video system).
•
For most set-ups, we recommend that you use two screens
or more. Place the main screen at the front of the room. Place
a second screen on the side or at the back, so that the local
presenter can see the remote audience.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
97
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 3 of 5)
Connect cables
If the video system has a single camera, then the
integrated camera (which is the Audience Camera)
uses only one HDMI input.
Connect the cameras to the video
system as shown in the illustration.
Following the illustration ensures
that the configurations that are
automatically pushed to the
video system when selecting the
Classroom room type template,
match your actual set-up.
Presenter
camera
You can have up to 3
screens, including the
integrated screen(s) 1
Keep all preconnected cables,
including the cables for the
integrated camera and screens,
as delivered from the factory. You
only have to connect the external
screens and cameras.
Audience
camera
(integrated
single
camera)
Computer
Presenter
camera
...
Ethernet switch
Microphones,
max 8
Audience camera
(integrated
dual camera)
To PoE injector
Network (LAN)
1
Ethernet switch
Since this set-up has more than two peripherals that
need an Ethernet connection to the codec, you need an
Ethernet switch. Do not connect the switch to Network
port 1, which is reserved for the LAN connection.
MX700 and MX800 Dual: Output 1 (HDMI) and output 2 (HDMI) are for the integrated screens of the room device. An external screen may be connected to output 3 (DVI).
MX800: Output 1 (HDMI) is for the integrated screen of the room device. External screens may be connected to output 2 (HDMI) and output 3 (DVI).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
98
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 4 of 5)
Configure the video system
We recommend you to be in the same room when setting up the
Classroom. Otherwise you are not able to set up PresenterTrack
properly.
1. Connect cameras and screens as described on the previous
page.
2. Use the Touch controller to stop sharing the video from the
Presenter camera. It is important that video from the Presenter
camera is not displayed on any screen while setting up
Classroom.
3. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration.
4. Go to the Video > Input > Connector n section, and set the
following (note that n is the number of the Connector where
the Presenter Camera is connected):
•
•
•
•
•
InputSourceType: camera
PresentationSelection: Manual
Quality: Motion
Visibility: Never
CameraControl Mode: On
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
5. Set up PresenterTrack for the Presenter camera, see the ►Set
up the PresenterTrack feature chapter.
6. Navigate to Setup > Configuration. Go to the Cameras >
PresenterTrack > PresenterDetectedStatus and choose
whether to enable (default) or disable automatic switching
between Local Presenter and Remote Presenter modes.
Click Save for the changes to take effect.
Read more about switching between modes on the next page.
7. If the default screen and layout behavior does not suit your
set-up, you must configure the screens and layouts using the
following settings:
•
Video > Monitors: Defines the number of different layouts
in your room set-up.
•
Video > Output > Connector n > MonitorRole: Defines
which layout each screen gets. Screens with different
monitor roles get different layouts.
Refer to the chapter about connecting monitors for details.
8. Navigate to Setup > Room Types, and click the Classroom
thumbnail to push the corresponding configuration to the
video system.
This feature enables the camera to follow a presenter that is
moving about on stage.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
99
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Classroom set-up (page 5 of 5)
Switching between room modes
Switching between room modes (Local Presenter, Remote
Presenter, Discussions), which implies that camera input sources,
and remote and local screen layouts, are changed, can be done in
two ways:
•
Automatically, based on who is speaking and whether a local
presenter is present on stage.
Automatic switching is only between the Local Presenter and
Remote Presenter modes. The room mode doesn't change
automatically if the current mode is Discussion.
Automatic swtiching is supported only when the
PresenterTrack feature enabled (Cameras > PresenterTrack >
Enabled set to True).
•
Manually, using the buttons on the Touch controller.
Automatic switching implies:
•
The system switches to the Local Presenter mode when a
person is detected in the PresenterTrack trigger zone.
•
The system switches to the Remote Presenter mode when the
local presenter, who is tracked, leaves the stage.
•
If someone in the local audience asks a question when the
system is in Local Presenter mode, the system sends splitscreen video showing both the presenter and the person
asking the question. This behavior requires a SpeakerTrack 60
or Quad Camera as Audience camera, and that speaker
tracking is switched on.
Switch between room modes manually
While in a conference, you can switch to another mode using the
Touch controller.
1. Tap Classroom on the Touch controller.
2. Tap the mode you want to change to: Local Presenter, Remote
Presenter, or Discussion. The current mode is highlighted.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
100
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Test the loudspeaker connections (page 1 of 2)
Loudspeakers
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
Developer API.
It is crucial for the conferencing
experience that the video system’s
loudspeakers are correctly connected to
the embedded codec.
We have provided a speaker check tool that you can run to
verify that the loudspeakers are correctly connected.
Correct cabling ensures that sound meant
to be coming from the right loudspeakers
actually comes from the right speakers,
and the sound meant to be coming from
the left loudspeakers actually comes from
the left speakers. If the speaker cables
are incorrectly connected this will not
take place.
You must be in the same room as the video system when
you test the loudspeaker connections.
Run the speaker check
If the speaker check reveals any issues,
you must reconnect the cables.
1. Enter the following command in the Execute API
commands and configurations text area: *
xCommand Audio SpeakerCheck
MeasurementLength: <number of seconds>
Volume: <test-signal volume>
How to reconnect cables
Check the Installation Guide for the
product for all details.
If you leave out the MeasurementLength and
Volume parameters, the test signal is emitted for
1 second from each speaker, and the volume is 1.
1. Remove the video system’s upper
textile grille. It snaps to magnets.
2. Click Execute.
2. Unscrew the screw that fastens the
loudspeaker (Torx T20). Then, release
the speaker gently from its peg.
The speaker check will now run, and a test signal
will be emitted from each speaker, in sequence
from left to right.
3. Disconnect the cable that is
connected incorrectly, and connect
the correct cable.
3. Listen for the test signals.
If one or more speakers do not make a sound, or
the sequence is not strictly from left to right, you
have to reconnect the loudspeaker cables and run
the speaker check again.
*
The cables are marked with a
number. Check the next page to see
which cable should be connected to
which loudspeaker.
Syntax and semantics are explained in the API guide for the video system.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
101
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Test the loudspeaker connections (page 2 of 2)
Find the correct cable for each loudspeaker
The numbers that are shown in the illustrations
are printed on the loudspeaker cables.
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
5
5
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
5
4
Not
used
MX700
with dual camera
MX700
with single camera
1
1
2
1
3
2
3
4
5
4
6
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
3
4
5
6
5
1
6
Not
used
MX800 Single
with single camera
2
Not
used
MX800 Single
with dual camera
2
3
4
5
6
MX800 Dual
102
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Using extra loudspeakers and sound reinforcement
When using the video system with local sound reinforcement,
extra loudspeakers are strongly recommended to ensure that
people in the room get the good auditory experience.
The Audio Console, found on the web interface for the
video system, is the recommended tool for setting up local
reinforcement. See the Using Extra Loudspeakers and Sound
Reinforcement guide for a comprehensive description and best
practices for the solution. Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
103
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 4)
Touch 10 must either be directly connected to the video
system as described on this page, or paired to the video
system via the network (LAN) as described on the next
page. The latter is referred to as remote pairing.
Connect Touch 10 directly to the video
system
Connect Touch 10 to the video system’s PoE injector as
illustrated.
Touch 10 set-up
Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up
procedure begins. Follow the instructions on screen.
If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be
downloaded from the video system and installed on the
unit automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch
10 restarts after the upgrade.
PoE rated Ethernet cable
Contact information
The video system’s name or
address is displayed in the status
bar when Touch 10 is successfully
connected to the video system.
The Ethernet connector
is at the rear of Touch 10.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
104
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 4)
Connect Touch 10 to the video system via the
network (LAN)
Connect Touch 10 and the video system to network wall sockets or
to a network switch as illustrated.
Touch 10 set-up
Once Touch 10 is connected to power, the set-up procedure begins.
Follow the instructions on screen.
Standard Ethernet cable
When the Select a room system screen appears, note the following:
•
A list of video systems signalling that they are available for paring
will show up on the screen. Tap the name of the video system
you want to pair with.
Network
(LAN)
Note that the following must be fulfilled for a video system to
show up in the list:
•
•
•
The video system and Touch 10 must be on the same subnet.
•
The video system must have been restarted within the last 10
minutes. If the video system does not appear in the list, try
restarting it.
If the video system does not appear in the list of available
systems, enter its IP address or hostname in the input field. Tap
Connect.
You have to log in with username and passphrase for the paring
process to commence. Tap Login.
A user with the USER role is sufficient; you do not need the
ADMIN role to perform this task.
Read more about how to create a user account and assign a role
to it in the ► User administration chapter.
If Touch 10 needs software upgrade, new software will be
downloaded from the video system and installed on the unit
automatically as part of the set-up procedure. Touch 10 restarts after
the upgrade.
Standard Ethernet cable
PoE
injector
Network
(LAN)1
SWITCH
Power
AP
PoE rated Ethernet cable
• 100-240 VAC
• 50/60 Hz
Contact information
The video system’s name or
address is displayed in the
status bar when Touch 10
is successfully paired to the
video system.
1
The Ethernet connector
is at the rear of Touch 10.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
105
If the network infrastructure provides
Power over Ethernet (PoE), you do not
need a PoE injector; Touch 10 should
be connected directly to the wall socket
(Ethernet switch) with a PoE rated
Ethernet cable.
For safety, the PoE source must be in
the same building as Touch 10. The PoE
rated Ethernet cable can be up to 100 m
(330 ft).
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 3 of 4)
Cisco Touch 10 physical interface
This is the new version of the Touch 10 controller launched late 2017. It has the same functionality
as the previous version, but has a slightly different physical interface. The new device is identified
by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.
Touch screen
Factory reset
(behind cover)
Adjustable support
to accommodate
individual ergonomic
needs
Micro-USB:
for maintenance only
(behind cover)
Ethernet with PoE:
for power and Ethernet
Sound bar for audio
adjustment
Audio mute
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
106
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Configuration
Connect the Touch 10 controller
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
(page 4 of 4)
Cisco TelePresence Touch 10 physical interface
See next page for a newer version of the Touch 10 controller.
Touch screen
Adjustable support
to accommodate
individual ergonomic
needs
Micro-USB:
for maintenance only
Two USB connectors
(not in use)
Ethernet with PoE:
for power and Ethernet
Sound bar for audio
adjustment
Audio mute
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Mini-jack, 3.5 mm
(not in use)
107
Not in use
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Connect the ISDN Link
The ISDN Link enables a video system to use ISDN lines for
connectivity, and enables both video calls and telephone calls
over the PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).
ISDN Link support ISDN BRI, ISDN PRI and V.35. ISDN can be
used in addition to regular IP connectivity for SIP or H.323 calls,
or without any IP infrastructure.
Setup with LAN and direct connection between the video system and ISDN Link
This is the recommended setup. But there are other options, so see the user documentation for
additional examples: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/isdnlink-docs
ISDN Link is managed from the video systems web interface. Sign
in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Peripherals.
Requirements:
•
The ISDN Link must be running IL1.1.7 software or later
•
The video system (codec) must be running CE9.3 software or
later. The ISDN Link must be re-paired with the video system
after the video system has been converted from TC software
to CE software.
•
The video endpoint must have IPv6 enabled in the web
interface or API in order to communicate with the ISDN Link
•
Observe the network topology in the ISDN Link Installation
Guide in order to guarantee a successful installation
•
The video system and ISDN Link must be on the same subnet.
If the endpoint or ISDN Link are assigned new IP addresses
they will only remain paired as long as they are kept in the
same subnet.
LAN
PC/Laptop for system
management
Video system
(represented by
an SX80 codec)
ISDN Link,
rear panel
Limitations:
•
Video systems that are registered to the Cisco Webex cloud
service are not able to use ISDN Link.
BRI
1-4
Setup and configuration
When converting the video system from TC (TC6 or later) to
CE software (CE9.3 or later) the ISDN Link will automatically be
unpaired due to security reasons.
PRI
NET
LAN
port
Video
system
port
Power
More information about ISDN Link (Release Notes, Installation
Guide, Administrator Guide, API Guide, Compliance and Safety
guide) is found here: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/isdnlink-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
108
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Chapter 4
Maintenance
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
109
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Upgrade the system software
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 2)
Upgrading from TC to CE software
Upgrading from CE8 to CE9
CE software is the evolution of TC software. We recommend
that you upgrade to TC7.3.6 or later before you upgrade to CE
software.
The MultiStream feature with Cisco TelePresence Server is
deprecated in CE9.
It is important that you read about upgrade requirements and
functionality changes before you upgrade to CE software.
Also check that your environment supports the changes. We
recommend reading the Software Release Notes carefully.
Also, some features that were available from the Touch controller
in CE8, are not available in the first CE9 releases. Read the
Software Release Notes for details before you upgrade.
If you don’t take into account these considerations, upgrading to
CE can leave you with a non-functioning deployment that requires
you to downgrade.
Upgrade to TC7.3.6 or later
Install CE9?
No
Is your video
system running
TC7.3.6 or later?
Yes
Use TC7.x software
Yes
Do you need TC
features that are
not supported in CE
software?*
TC
Which software
version is the video
system running?
CE
Do you need
MultiStream with
Cisco TelePresence
Server?
Yes
Use CE8.x software
No
*
CE software does not support the
following features and products:
-- MultiWay conferencing
-- CTMS conferencing
-- MediaNet
-- Displays that do not support 16:9
or 16:10 resolution
-- Custom video layouts using TC
Console.
Update your application
to the new API commands
before installing CE9
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Yes
Are you currently
using the API (for
example Crestron or
AMX)?
No
No
Install CE9
110
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Upgrade the system software
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
Software download
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Software Upgrade.
Go to the Cisco Download Software web
page, and select your product: ► https://
software.cisco.com/download/home
The SX, MX and DX series can be
upgraded from the web interface using
PKG files.
Download new software
Each software version has a unique file name. Go to the Cisco
Download Software web page, and select your product:
► https://software.cisco.com/download/home
The format of the file name:
“s52020ce9_7_x-yyy.pkg”
Where "x" represents the dot release number, and "yyy"
represents a unique identifier of the software.
Software release notes
For a complete overview of the news and changes, we
recommend reading the Software Release Notes (CE9).
Go to: ► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/
collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-mx-series/tsdproducts-support-series-home.html
Install new software
Download the appropriate software package and store it on your
computer. This is a .pkg file. Don’t change the file name.
1. Click Browse... and find the .pkg file that contains the new
software.
The software version will be detected and shown.
2. Click Install software to start the installation process.
Check new software version
The complete installation normally take no longer than 15 minutes.
You can follow the progress on the web page. The video system
restarts automatically after the installation.
When you have selected a file, the
software version is shown here
You must sign in anew in order to continue working with the web
interface after the restart.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
111
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Add option keys
About option keys
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Option Keys.
Your video system may or may not have
one or more software options installed. In
order to activate the optional functionality
the corresponding option key must be
present on the video system.
You see a list of all option keys, also the ones that are not
installed on your video system.
Contact your Cisco representative for information about how to
get option keys for the uninstalled options.
Each video system has unique option
keys.
Option keys are not deleted when
performing a software upgrade or factory
reset, so they need to be added only
once.
The video system’s serial number
You need the video system’s serial number
when ordering an option key.
Add an option key
1. Enter an Option Key in the text input field.
2. Click Add option key.
If you want to add more than one option key,
repeat these steps for all keys.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
112
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
System status
System information overview
Detailed system status
Sign in to the web interface to see the System Information page.
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup > Status in
order to find more detailed status information*.
This page shows the product type, system name and basic
information about the hardware, software, installed options and
network address. Registration status for the video networks (SIP
and H.323) is included, as well as the number/URI to use when
making a call to the system.
Search for a status entry
Enter as many letters as needed in the search field. All entries that
contain these letters are shown in the right pane. Entries that have
these letters in their value space are also shown.
Select a category and navigate to the correct status
The system status is grouped in categories. Choose a category in
the left pane to show the related status to the right.
*
The status shown in the illustration serve as an example. The status of your
system may be different.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
113
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Run diagnostics
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Diagnostics.
The diagnostics page lists the status for some common
sources of errors*.
Errors and critical issues are clearly marked in red color;
warnings are yellow.
*
Run diagnostics
Click Re-run diagnostics to ensure that
the list is up to date.
Leave standby mode
Click Wake up the system to wake
up a video system that is in standby
mode.
The messages shown in the illustration serve as examples. Your system
may show other information.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
114
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Download log files
About log files
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to
Maintenance > System Logs.
The log files are Cisco specific debug
files which may be requested by the
Cisco support organization if you need
technical support.
Download all log files
Start extended logging
Click Download logs archive...
and follow the instructions.
Click Start extended logging....
An anonymized call history
is included in the log files by
default.
Use the drop down list if
you want to exclude the call
history from the log files, or
if you want to include the full
call history (non-anonymous
caller/callee).
Open/save one log file
Click the file name to open the
log file in the web browser;
right click to save the file on
the computer.
Extended logging lasts for
3 or 10 minutes, depending
on whether full capture of
network traffic is included or
not.
Click Stop extended logging if
you want to stop the extended
logging before it times out.
As default, the network traffic
is not captured. Use the drop
down menu if you want to
include partial or full capture of
network traffic.
The current log files are time stamped
event log files.
All current log files are archived in a time
stamped historical log file each time the
video system restarts. If the maximum
number of historical log files is reached,
the oldest one will be overwritten.
Extended logging mode
Extended logging mode may be switched
on to help diagnose network issues and
problems during call setup. While in this
mode more information is stored in the
log files.
Extended logging uses more of the video
system’s resources, and may cause the
video system to under-perform. Only use
extended logging mode when you are
troubleshooting an issue.
Refresh a log file list
Click the refresh button for
Current logs or Historical logs
to update the corresponding
lists.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
115
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Create a remote support user
About the remote support
user
Sign in to the web interface, navigate to Maintenance > System
Recovery and select the Remote Support User tab.
In cases where you need to diagnose
problems on the video system you can
create a remote support user.
The remote support user should only be enabled for
troubleshooting reasons when instructed by Cisco TAC.
The remote support user is granted read
access to the system and has access to
a limited set of commands that can aid
troubleshooting.
You will need assistance from Cisco
Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to
acquire the password for the remote
support user.
Create remote support user
1. Click Create user.
2. Open a case with Cisco TAC.
3. Copy the text in the Token field and send
it to Cisco TAC.
4. Cisco TAC will generate a password.
The remote support user is valid for seven
days, or until it is deleted.
Delete remote support user
Click Delete user.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
116
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Backup and restore configurations and custom elements
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
Backup and Restore.
You can include custom elements as well as configurations in a
backup file (zip-format). You can choose which of the following
elements to include in the bundle:
Create a backup file
Additional information
1. Open the Create backup tab.
2. Select the elements you want to include in the backup file.
Elements that currently don’t exist on the video system are
greyed out.
•
Branding images
•
Macros
•
Favorites
•
As default, all settings are included in the backup file.
•
Sign-in banner
•
•
In-room control panels
You can remove one or more settings manually by
deleting them from the list on the web page.
•
Configurations/settings (all or a sub-set)
•
If you want to remove all settings that are specific
to one video system, click Remove system-specific
configurations.
The backup file can either be restored manually from the video
system’s web interface, or you can generalize the backup bundle
so that it can be provisioned across multiple video systems, for
example using Cisco UCM or TMS (see the next chapters).
3. Select which settings - if any - you want to include in the
backup file. Note the following:
This is useful if you are going to restore the backup bundle
on other video systems.
4. Click Download backup to store the elements in a zip-file on
your computer.
Restoring macros
If a backup file that contains macros is
restored on a video system the following
applies:
•
The macro runtime is started or
restarted.
•
The macros are automatically
activated (started).
Restoring branding images
If a backup bundle contains branding
images, the UserInterface Wallpaper
setting is automatically set to Auto.
This means that the branding images
will automatically be displayed, possibly
replacing a custom wallpaper.
The backup file
Restore a backup file
1. Choose the Restore backup tab.
2. Click Browse... and find the backup file you want to restore.
All settings and elements in the backup file will be applied.
The backup file is a zip-file that contains
several files. It is important that the files
are at the top level within the zip-file, and
not include in a folder.
3. Click Upload file to apply the backup.
Some settings may require that you restart the video system
before they take effect.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
117
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
CUCM provisioning of custom elements
A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore
configurations and custom elements chapter, can be used as a
customization template for multiple video systems.
Upload a customization template to the TFTP file
server
1. Sign in to Cisco Unified OS Administration.
2. Navigate to Software Upgrades > TFTP File Management.
The customization template (backup file) may be hosted on either:
•
the CUCM TFTP file service, or
•
a custom web server that can be reached by the video
systems on HTTP or HTTPS.
When a video system get information from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager) about the name and location of a
customization template, the video system will contact the server,
download the file, and restore the custom elements.
SHA512 checksum
Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum
of a file by restoring it to a video system
using its web interface.
3. Click Upload File. Enter the name and path of the
customization template in the input field.
1. Sign in to the web interface and
navigate to Maintenance > Backup
and Restore.
4. Click Upload File.
2. Choose the Restore backup tab.
Add customization provisioning information for each
video system
1. Sign in to Cisco Unified CM Administration.
3. Click Browse... and find the file you
want to calculate the checksum for.
Then you can see the SHA512
checksum at the bottom of the page.
2. Navigate to Device > Phone.
Configurations will not be restored on the video system,
even if they are part of the backup file that you use as a
customization template.
3. Fill in the Customization Provisioning fields in the product
specific configuration section of the relevant devices:
•
Customization File: The customization template file name
(for example: backup.zip) *
•
Customization Hash Type: SHA512
•
Cutomization Hash: The SHA512 checksum for the
customization template.
CUCM documentation
► https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/
support/unified-communications/unifiedcommunications-manager-callmanager/
tsd-products-support-series-home.html
If these fields are not present, you must install a newer Device
Package on CUCM.
4. Click Save and Apply Config to push the configuration to the
video systems.
*
If not using the TFTP Service, you must enter the complete URI for the
customization template: <hostname>:<portnumber>/<path-and-filename>
For example:
• http://host:6970/backup.zip, or
• https://host:6971/backup.zip
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
118
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
TMS provisioning of custom elements
A backup file, as described in the ► Backup and restore
configurations and custom elements chapter, can be used as a
customization template for multiple video systems.
SHA512 checksum
Create and apply a configuration template
1. Create a configurations template.
2. Add a custom command containing the following XML string in
the configuration template:
The backup file must be hosted on a custom web server that can
be reached by the video systems on HTTP or HTTPS.
<Command>
<Provisioning>
<Service>
<Fetch>
<URL>web-server-address</URL>
<Checksum>checksum</Checksum>
<Origin>origin</Origin>
</Fetch>
</Service>
</Provisioning>
</Command>
When a video system get information from TMS (TelePresence
Management Suite) about the name and location of the backup
file, the video system will contact the server, download the file,
and restore the custom elements.
Tip! You can find the SHA512 checksum
of a file by restoring it to a video system
using its web interface.
1. Sign in to the web interface and
navigate to Maintenance > Backup
and Restore.
2. Choose the Restore backup tab.
3. Click Browse... and find the file you
want to calculate the checksum for.
Then you can see the SHA512
checksum at the bottom of the page.
where
web-server-address: The URI to the backup file (for
example, http://host/backup.zip).
checksum: The SHA512 checksum of the backup file.
origin: Provisioning *
3. Select the video systems you want to push the configuration
template to, and click Set on systems.
Read the ► Cisco TMS administrator guide for details how
to create TMS configurations templates and make custom
commands.
*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
If not setting this parameter to Provisioning, also configurations that are part of
the backup file will be pushed to the video system. If the backup file contains
configurations that are specific to one video system, for example static IP
addresses, system name, and contact information, you may and up with video
systems that you cannot reach.
119
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Revert to the previously used software image
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
System Recovery.
We recommend you to back up the log files, configurations, and
custom elements of the video system before you swap to the
previously used software image.
About the previously used
software image
Back up log files, configurations and custom elements
If there is a severe problem with the video
system, switching to the previously used
software image may help solving the
problem.
1. Select the Backup tab.
2. Click Download logs and follow the instructions to save the log
files on your computer.
3. Click Download backup and follow the instructions to save the
backup bundle on your computer.
If the system has not been factory reset
since the last software upgrade, the
previously used software image still
resides on the system. You do not have to
download the software again.
Revert to the previously used software image
Only administrators, or when in contact with Cisco technical
support, should perform this procedure.
1. Select the Software Recovery Swap tab.
2. Click Switch to software: cex.y.z..., where x.y.z indicates the
software version.
3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have
changed your mind.
Wait while the system resets. The system restarts automatically
when finished. This procedure may take a few minutes.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
120
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Factory reset the video system
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
(page 1 of 3)
If there is a severe problem with the video system, the last resort
may be to reset it to its default factory settings.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset.
Always consider reverting to the previously used software
image before performing a factory reset. In many situations this
will recover the system. Read about software swapping in the
► Revert to the previously used software image chapter.
We recommend that you use the web interface or user interface
to factory reset the video system. If these interfaces are not
available, use the reset pin-hole.
A factory reset implies:
•
Call logs are deleted.
•
Passphrases are reset to default.
•
All system parameters are reset to default values.
•
All files that have been uploaded to the system are deleted.
This includes, but is not limited to, custom wallpaper,
certificates, and favorites lists.
•
The previous (inactive) software image is deleted.
•
Option keys are not affected.
The video system restarts automatically after the factory reset. It
is using the same software image as before.
We recommend that you back up the log files, configurations,
and custom elements of the video system before you perform a
factory reset; otherwise these data will be lost.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
121
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset the video system (page 2 of 3)
Factory reset using the web interface
Factory reset from the user interface
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
System Recovery.
1. Select the Factory Reset tab, and read the provided
information carefully.
2. Click Perform a factory reset....
3. Click Yes to confirm your choice, or Cancel if you have
changed your mind.
4. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner of the
user interface.
Back up log files,
configurations, and custom
elements
Sign in to the web interface and navigate
to Maintenance > System Recovery.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Factory reset.
4. Select Reset to confirm your choice, or Back if you have
changed your mind.
5. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome screen.
122
Back up log files, configurations,
and custom element
1. Select the Backup tab.
2. Click Download logs and follow the
instructions to save the log files on
your computer.
3. Click Download backup and follow
the instructions to save the backup
bundle on your computer.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset the video system (page 3 of 3)
Factory reset using the reset button
We recommend that you back up the log files and configuration of
the video system before you continue with the factory reset.
1. Remove the left side cover of the video system to get
access to the codec connector panel.
The cover snaps to magnets.
2. Use a paper clip (or similar) to press and hold the
recessed reset button until the screen turns black
(approximately 10 seconds). Then release the button.
3. Wait while the video system reverts to the default factory
settings. When finished, the video system restarts
automatically. This may take a few minutes.
When the system has been successfully reset to factory
settings, the Setup assistant starts with the Welcome
screen.
Reset button
(pin hole)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
123
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset Cisco Touch 10
This chapter applies to the new Touch 10 controller that was
launched late 2017 (Cisco Touch 10). This device is identified
by the logo on front, and fewer connectors at the back.
See the next page for the older version.
1. Open the small cover at the rear to find the reset button.
2. Press and hold the reset button until the mute button at the
front starts blinking (approximately 5 seconds). Then release
the button.
Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings
and restarts.
In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch
controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when
in contact with the Cisco support organization.
If Touch 10 is directly connected to the video system it
receives a new configuration automatically from the video
system.
When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing
information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video system) is
reverted to factory defaults.
If Touch 10 is connected via LAN the device must be paired to
the video system anew. When successfully paired it receives
a new configuration automatically from the video system.
About pairing and how to
connect Touch 10 to the
video system
In order to use the Touch 10 controller,
Touch 10 must either be directly
connected to the codec, or paired to the
codec via LAN. The latter is referred to as
remote pairing.
Read about pairing and how to connect
Touch 10 to the video system in the
► Connect the Touch 10 controller
chapter.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset.
Open the cover to
find the reset button
Reset button
Mute button starts blinking
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
124
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Factory reset Cisco TelePresence Touch 10
This chapter applies to the first Touch 10 controller (Cisco
TelePresence Touch 10). This device has no logo on front.
See the previous page for the newer version that was
launched late 2017.
1. Locate the Mute and Volume down buttons.
2. Press and hold the Mute button until it starts blinking (red and
green). It takes approximately 10 seconds.
3. Press the Volume down button twice.
Touch 10 automatically reverts to the default factory settings
and restarts.
In an error situation it may be required to factory reset the Touch
controller to recover connectivity. This should be done only when
in contact with the Cisco support organization.
When factory resetting the Touch controller the pairing
information is lost, and the Touch itself (not the video system) is
reverted to factory defaults.
If Touch 10 is directly connected to the video system it
receives a new configuration automatically from the video
system.
If Touch 10 is connected via LAN the device must be paired to
the video system anew. When successfully paired it receives
a new configuration automatically from the video system.
About pairing and how to
connect Touch 10 to the
video system
In order to use the Touch 10 controller,
Touch 10 must either be directly
connected to the codec, or paired to the
codec via LAN. The latter is referred to as
remote pairing.
Read about pairing and how to connect
Touch 10 to the video system in the
► Connect the Touch 10 controller
chapter.
It is not possible to undo a factory reset.
Mute
Volume down
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
125
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Maintenance
Maintenance
Peripherals
System settings
Appendices
Capture user interface screenshots
About user interface
screenshots
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Maintenance >
User Interface Screenshots.
You can capture screenshots both of
a Touch controller that is connected to
the video system, and of the on-screen
display (menus, indicators and messages
on the main display).
Delete screenshots
If you want to delete all screenshots,
click Remove all.
To delete just one screenshot, click
the × button for that screenshot.
Capture a screenshot
Click Take screenshot of Touch Panel to
capture a screenshot of the Touch controller,
or click Take screenshot of OSD to capture a
screenshot of the on-screen display.
The screenshot displays in the area below
the buttons. It may take up to 30 seconds
before the screenshot is ready.
All captured snapshots are included
in the list above the buttons. Click the
screenshot ID to display the image.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
126
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Chapter 5
System settings
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
127
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Overview of the system settings
Audio settings................................................................................................................ 134
Audio DefaultVolume.......................................................................................................... 134
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level................................................................................................. 134
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode................................................................................................ 134
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo.......................................... 134
Audio Input Line [n] Channel.............................................................................................. 135
Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer ID......................................................................................... 134
Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer Mode................................................................................... 135
Audio Input Line [n] Level................................................................................................... 135
Audio Input Line [n] Mode.................................................................................................. 136
Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo............................................ 135
Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource.................................................. 135
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Dereverberation................................................ 136
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode................................................................. 136
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl NoiseReduction................................................. 136
Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer ID............................................................................ 136
Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer Mode...................................................................... 136
Audio Input Microphone [n] Level....................................................................................... 137
Audio Input Microphone [n] Mode...................................................................................... 137
Audio Input Microphone [n] Type....................................................................................... 137
Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo................................ 137
Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource..................................... 138
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain.............................................................................. 139
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [n] Mode.......................................... 138
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [n] Mode.................................................... 138
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled..................................................................................... 138
Audio Output HDMI [n] Level.............................................................................................. 139
Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode............................................................................................. 139
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode.................................................................................. 139
Audio Output Line [n] Channel........................................................................................... 139
Audio Output Line [n] Delay DelayMs................................................................................. 139
Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode..................................................................................... 140
Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer ID...................................................................................... 140
Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer Mode................................................................................ 140
Audio Output Line [n] Level................................................................................................ 140
In the following pages you will find a complete list of the system
settings which are configured from the Setup > Configuration
page on the web interface.
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the video
system then sign in.
How to find the IP address
1. Select the contact information in the upper left corner
of the user interface.
2. Select Settings, followed by About this device.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
128
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference settings...................................................................................................... 149
Conference ActiveControl Mode....................................................................................... 149
Conference AutoAnswer Delay.......................................................................................... 149
Conference AutoAnswer Mode......................................................................................... 149
Conference AutoAnswer Mute.......................................................................................... 149
Conference CallProtocolIPStack........................................................................................ 149
Conference DefaultCall Protocol....................................................................................... 150
Conference DefaultCall Rate.............................................................................................. 150
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout........................................................................ 150
Conference Encryption Mode............................................................................................ 150
Conference FarEndControl Mode...................................................................................... 150
Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability.......................................................................151
Conference FarEndMessage Mode....................................................................................151
Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode........................................................................... 153
Conference MaxReceiveCallRate.......................................................................................151
Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate................................................................................151
Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate.............................................................................. 152
Conference MaxTransmitCallRate.......................................................................................151
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode.................................................................... 152
Conference Multipoint Mode............................................................................................. 152
Conference MultiStream Mode.......................................................................................... 152
Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold...................................................................... 153
Conference Presentation RelayQuality.............................................................................. 153
Conference VideoBandwidth Mode................................................................................... 153
Audio Output Line [n] Mode............................................................................................... 140
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone..................................................................................... 140
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume..................................................................................141
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume.............................................................................................141
Audio Ultrasound Mode......................................................................................................141
CallHistory settings........................................................................................................ 142
CallHistory Mode.................................................................................................................142
Cameras settings........................................................................................................... 143
Cameras Camera [n] AssignedSerialNumber.................................................................... 143
Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode..................................................................... 143
Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel................................................................... 143
Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode.............................................................................. 143
Cameras Camera [n] Flip.................................................................................................... 144
Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode..................................................................................... 144
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level................................................................................... 144
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode.................................................................................. 144
Cameras Camera [n] Mirror................................................................................................ 145
Cameras Camera [n] MotorMoveDetection........................................................................ 145
Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level.......................................................................... 145
Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode......................................................................... 145
Cameras PowerLine Frequency......................................................................................... 146
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan.................................................................. 146
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt................................................................... 146
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom............................................................... 146
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector.................................................................................. 146
Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled...................................................................................... 146
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus...........................................................147
Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone................................................................................147
Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus......................................................................................147
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup........................................................................................ 148
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft................................................. 148
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight............................................... 148
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode.......................................................... 148
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode.............................................................................................147
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode.............................................................................. 148
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode........................................................................ 148
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System
System settings
settings
FacilityService settings.................................................................................................. 154
FacilityService Service [n] CallType................................................................................... 154
FacilityService Service [n] Name....................................................................................... 154
FacilityService Service [n] Number.................................................................................... 154
FacilityService Service [n] Type......................................................................................... 154
GPIO settings................................................................................................................. 155
GPIO Pin [n] Mode.............................................................................................................. 155
H323 settings................................................................................................................. 156
H323 Authentication LoginName....................................................................................... 156
H323 Authentication Mode................................................................................................ 156
H323 Authentication Password......................................................................................... 156
H323 CallSetup Mode........................................................................................................ 156
129
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] IPv4 Assignment............................................................................................. 165
Network [n] IPv4 Gateway.................................................................................................. 165
Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask............................................................................................ 165
Network [n] IPv6 Address.................................................................................................. 166
Network [n] IPv6 Assignment............................................................................................. 165
Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions.......................................................................................... 166
Network [n] IPv6 Gateway.................................................................................................. 166
Network [n] MTU................................................................................................................ 166
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio......................................................................................... 167
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data........................................................................................... 167
Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6...................................................................................... 168
Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP........................................................................................... 168
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling................................................................................... 167
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video......................................................................................... 167
Network [n] QoS Mode....................................................................................................... 166
Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow...................................................................................... 168
Network [n] Speed............................................................................................................. 168
Network [n] TrafficControl Mode........................................................................................ 169
Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode.......................................................................................... 169
Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId.......................................................................................... 169
H323 Encryption KeySize................................................................................................... 157
H323 Gatekeeper Address................................................................................................ 157
H323 H323Alias E164........................................................................................................ 157
H323 H323Alias ID............................................................................................................. 157
H323 NAT Address............................................................................................................ 158
H323 NAT Mode................................................................................................................ 157
H323 PortAllocation........................................................................................................... 158
HttpClient settings......................................................................................................... 159
HttpClient AllowHTTP........................................................................................................ 159
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS........................................................................................ 159
HttpClient Mode................................................................................................................. 159
Logging settings............................................................................................................ 160
Logging External Mode...................................................................................................... 160
Logging External Protocol.................................................................................................. 160
Logging External Server Address...................................................................................... 160
Logging External Server Port............................................................................................. 160
Logging Internal Mode....................................................................................................... 160
Logging Mode.................................................................................................................... 160
Macros settings............................................................................................................. 161
Macros AutoStart................................................................................................................161
Macros Mode......................................................................................................................161
NetworkServices settings.............................................................................................. 170
NetworkServices CDP Mode..............................................................................................170
NetworkServices H323 Mode............................................................................................170
NetworkServices HTTP Mode............................................................................................170
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName.........................................................................170
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode..................................................................................171
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl................................................................................171
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password...........................................................................171
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url.......................................................................................171
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode...............................................................................171
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL.................................................................................171
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion.......................................................172
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity..............................................................172
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate................................................................172
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate..............................................................172
NetworkServices NTP Mode..............................................................................................172
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address..........................................................................173
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key.................................................................................173
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn...................................................................173
Network settings............................................................................................................ 162
Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode....................................................................................... 162
Network [n] DNS Domain Name......................................................................................... 162
Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address................................................................................. 162
Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity....................................................................... 163
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5........................................................................................ 164
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap....................................................................................... 164
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls.......................................................................................... 164
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls......................................................................................... 164
Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity.......................................................................................... 163
Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode............................................................................................. 162
Network [n] IEEE8021X Password...................................................................................... 163
Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify........................................................................................ 163
Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate..................................................................... 163
Network [n] IPStack............................................................................................................ 164
Network [n] IPv4 Address................................................................................................... 165
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System
System settings
settings
130
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Proximity settings.......................................................................................................... 183
Proximity Mode.................................................................................................................. 183
Proximity Services CallControl.......................................................................................... 183
Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients.................................................................. 183
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients...................................................................... 183
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId..............................................................................173
NetworkServices SIP Mode................................................................................................173
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName........................................................................174
NetworkServices SNMP Host [n] Address..........................................................................174
NetworkServices SNMP Mode...........................................................................................174
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact...........................................................................174
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation..........................................................................174
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey...............................................................................175
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm...........................................................................175
NetworkServices SSH Mode..............................................................................................175
NetworkServices Telnet Mode...........................................................................................175
NetworkServices UPnP Mode............................................................................................175
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout........................................................................................176
NetworkServices Websocket.............................................................................................176
NetworkServices WelcomeText..........................................................................................176
NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode........................................................................................176
RoomAnalytics settings................................................................................................. 184
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector.......................................................................... 184
RoomReset settings....................................................................................................... 185
RoomReset Control............................................................................................................ 185
RTP settings................................................................................................................... 186
RTP Ports Range Start....................................................................................................... 186
RTP Ports Range Stop....................................................................................................... 186
RTP Video Ports Range Start............................................................................................. 186
RTP Video Ports Range Stop............................................................................................. 186
Security settings............................................................................................................ 187
Security Audit Logging Mode............................................................................................ 187
Security Audit OnError Action............................................................................................ 187
Security Audit Server Address.......................................................................................... 187
Security Audit Server Port................................................................................................. 188
Security Audit Server PortAssignment.............................................................................. 188
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime...................................................................... 188
Security Session InactivityTimeout.................................................................................... 188
Security Session MaxFailedLogins.................................................................................... 188
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser............................................................................ 188
Security Session MaxTotalSessions.................................................................................. 189
Security Session ShowLastLogon..................................................................................... 189
Peripherals settings....................................................................................................... 177
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience...................................................... 177
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing...................................................... 177
Peripherals Profile Cameras.............................................................................................. 177
Peripherals Profile ControlSystems................................................................................... 177
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels.........................................................................................178
Phonebook settings....................................................................................................... 179
Phonebook Server [n] ID.....................................................................................................179
Phonebook Server [n] Pagination........................................................................................179
Phonebook Server [n] Type.................................................................................................179
Phonebook Server [n] URL..................................................................................................179
Provisioning settings...................................................................................................... 180
Provisioning Connectivity.................................................................................................. 180
Provisioning ExternalManager Address............................................................................. 180
Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress............................................................... 180
Provisioning ExternalManager Domain...............................................................................181
Provisioning ExternalManager Path....................................................................................181
Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol............................................................................. 180
Provisioning LoginName.....................................................................................................181
Provisioning Mode..............................................................................................................181
Provisioning Password....................................................................................................... 182
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System
System settings
settings
SerialPort settings......................................................................................................... 190
SerialPort BaudRate........................................................................................................... 190
SerialPort LoginRequired................................................................................................... 190
SerialPort Mode................................................................................................................. 190
SIP settings.................................................................................................................... 191
SIP ANAT............................................................................................................................191
SIP Authentication Password..............................................................................................191
SIP Authentication UserName............................................................................................191
SIP DefaultTransport...........................................................................................................191
131
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
UserInterface settings.................................................................................................... 202
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification........................................................ 202
UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors................................................................ 202
UserInterface ContactInfo Type......................................................................................... 202
UserInterface CustomMessage......................................................................................... 202
UserInterface Features Call End........................................................................................ 203
UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls..................................................................... 203
UserInterface Features Call Start...................................................................................... 203
UserInterface Features Call VideoMute............................................................................. 203
UserInterface Features HideAll.......................................................................................... 203
UserInterface Features Share Start................................................................................... 204
UserInterface KeyTones Mode........................................................................................... 203
UserInterface Language.................................................................................................... 204
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator............................................................................. 204
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage.............................................................................. 204
UserInterface OSD Output................................................................................................. 205
UserInterface Phonebook Mode........................................................................................ 205
UserInterface Security Mode............................................................................................. 205
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode.................................................................................... 205
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility................................................................................ 206
UserInterface Sounds Mode.............................................................................................. 206
UserInterface Wallpaper.................................................................................................... 206
SIP DisplayName.................................................................................................................191
SIP Ice DefaultCandidate................................................................................................... 192
SIP Ice Mode...................................................................................................................... 192
SIP Line.............................................................................................................................. 192
SIP ListenPort.................................................................................................................... 192
SIP Mailbox........................................................................................................................ 192
SIP MinimumTLSVersion.................................................................................................... 193
SIP PreferredIPSignaling.................................................................................................... 193
SIP Proxy [n] Address........................................................................................................ 193
SIP TlsVerify....................................................................................................................... 193
SIP Turn DiscoverMode..................................................................................................... 193
SIP Turn DropRflx............................................................................................................... 193
SIP Turn Password............................................................................................................. 194
SIP Turn Server.................................................................................................................. 194
SIP Turn UserName........................................................................................................... 194
SIP Type............................................................................................................................. 194
SIP URI............................................................................................................................... 194
Standby settings............................................................................................................ 195
Standby BootAction........................................................................................................... 195
Standby Control................................................................................................................. 195
Standby Delay.................................................................................................................... 195
Standby PowerSave........................................................................................................... 196
Standby StandbyAction..................................................................................................... 195
Standby WakeupAction...................................................................................................... 195
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection................................................................................. 195
UserManagement settings............................................................................................. 207
UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter................................................................................ 207
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group.............................................................................. 207
UserManagement LDAP Attribute...................................................................................... 207
UserManagement LDAP BaseDN...................................................................................... 207
UserManagement LDAP Encryption.................................................................................. 207
UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion................................................................... 208
UserManagement LDAP Mode.......................................................................................... 208
UserManagement LDAP Server Address.......................................................................... 208
UserManagement LDAP Server Port................................................................................. 208
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate............................................................... 208
SystemUnit settings....................................................................................................... 197
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced............................................................................. 197
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode.................................................................................... 197
SystemUnit CrashReporting Url......................................................................................... 197
SystemUnit Name.............................................................................................................. 197
Time settings................................................................................................................. 198
Time DateFormat............................................................................................................... 198
Time TimeFormat............................................................................................................... 198
Time WorkDay End............................................................................................................ 200
Time WorkDay Start........................................................................................................... 200
Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek..................................................................................... 200
Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek..................................................................................... 201
Time Zone.......................................................................................................................... 199
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System
System settings
settings
Video settings................................................................................................................ 209
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition........................................................................... 209
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local....................................................................................... 209
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote....................................................................................210
Video DefaultMainSource...................................................................................................210
132
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId.........................................................210
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode...............................................................210
Video Input Connector [n] DviType.....................................................................................211
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType.......................................................................211
Video Input Connector [n] Name.........................................................................................211
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile............................................................211
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps............................................212
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection...............................................................212
Video Input Connector [n] Quality.......................................................................................213
Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange.............................................................213
Video Input Connector [n] SignalType.................................................................................213
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility.....................................................................................213
Video Monitors....................................................................................................................214
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode..............................................................................214
Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset......................................................215
Video Output Connector [n] Location VerticalOffset..........................................................215
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole............................................................................216
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution..............................................................................216
Video Output Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange..........................................................216
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition...............................................................................216
Video Presentation DefaultSource......................................................................................217
Video Presentation Priority.................................................................................................217
Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode.............................................................................217
Video Selfview Default Mode..............................................................................................217
Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole...............................................................................218
Video Selfview Default PIPPosition.....................................................................................218
Video Selfview OnCall Duration..........................................................................................218
Video Selfview OnCall Mode..............................................................................................218
Experimental settings.................................................................................................... 219
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
133
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Audio settings
Audio DefaultVolume
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Define the default volume for the speakers. The volume is set to this value when you switch
on or restart the video system. Use the controls on the user interface to change the volume
while it is running. You may also use API commands (xCommand Audio Volume) to change
the volume while the video system is running, and to reset to default value.
n: 2..3 for single camera systems; 3..3 for dual camera systems
Use this setting to decide whether to stop the audio playback of a connected presentation
source if that presentation source is not currently shown on-screen, or to always playback
the audio as long as the presentation source is connected.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 50
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (0..100)
Value space: Off/On
Range: Select a value between 1 and 100. This corresponds to the dB range from -34.5
dB to 15 dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. If set to 0 the audio is switched off.
Off: Audio is played, locally and to far end, as long as a presentation source is
connected; you do not have to present the HDMI input source.
On: Audio is played, locally and to far end, only when the connected presentation source
is shown on-screen.
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level
n: 2..3 for single camera systems; 3..3 for dual camera systems
Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer ID
Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
n: 1..4
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Select the equalizer ID of the audio source that is connected to the line input.
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode
Set the equalizer ID.
n: 2..3 for single camera systems; 3..3 for dual camera systems
Define if the audio on the HDMI input connector shall be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable audio on the HDMI input.
On: Enable audio on the HDMI input.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
134
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer Mode
Audio Input Line [n] Channel
n: 1..4
n: 1..4
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the line input.
Define whether the audio source on the line input is a mono signal or part of a multichannel
signal.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Default value: Left
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Left/Mono/Right
Off: No equalizer.
Left: The Audio Line input signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio source that is connected to the line input.
Mono: The Audio Line input signal is a mono signal.
Right: The Audio Line input signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
n: 1..4
Audio Input Line [n] Level
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and
you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is
presented or not.
n: 1..4
Set the gain on the Line input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the output
level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Line [1, 2]: On Line [3, 4]: Off
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio
signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Value space: Off/On
The maximum input level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Off: The audio source is not associated with a video source. The audio will be played
locally and to far end regardless of whether the video source is presented.
Example: If your audio source has a maximum output level of 8 dBu, then you should set the
gain to 22 dBu - 8 dBu = 14 dB.
On: The audio source is associated with a video source. The audio will be played (locally
and to far end) when the associated video source is presented. The audio will be muted
when the video source is not presented.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 10
Value space: Integer (0..24)
Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
n: 1..4
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Line [1, 2]: 4 Line [3, 4]: 1
Value space: 1/2/3/4
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
135
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio Input Line [n] Mode
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl NoiseReduction
n: 1..4
n: 1..8
Define the mode for the audio input line.
Default value: On
The system has built-in noise reduction, which reduces stationary background noise, for
example noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc. In addition, a high pass filter
(Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise. Noise reduction requires that Audio Input
Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Off: Disable the Audio Line input.
Default value: On
On: Enable the Audio Line input.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Turn off the noise reduction.
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode
On: Turn on the noise reduction. Recommended in the presence of low frequency noise.
n: 1..8
Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer ID
The echo canceller continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room, and
compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in the
audio conditions are significant, the echo canceller may take a second or two to re-adjust.
n: 1..8
Select the equalizer ID of the source that is connected to the microphone input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Default value: 1
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Off: Turn off the echo control. Recommended if external echo cancellation or playback
equipment is used.
Set the equalizer ID.
On: Turn on the echo control. Recommended, in general, to prevent the far end from
hearing their own audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times.
Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer Mode
n: 1..8
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Dereverberation
n: 1..8
Define the equalizer mode for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
The system has built-in signal processing to reduce the effect of room reverberation.
Dereverberation requires that Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Off/On
Default value: Off
Off: No equalizer.
Default value: Off
On: Enable the equalizer for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Turn off the dereverberation.
On: Turn on the dereverberation.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
136
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio Input Microphone [n] Level
Audio Input Microphone [n] Type
n: 1..8
n: 1..8
Set the gain on the Microphone input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the
output level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
The microphone connectors are intended for electret type microphones. The microphone
connector can be set to Line or Microphone type. The pre-amplification gain is fully
determined by the Audio Input Microphone Level setting. There is no limitation of the
adjustment range caused by the chosen type.
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio
signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Note that unprocessed speech signals typically contain significant level variations, making it
very important to allow for sufficient signal headroom.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Microphone
The maximum input level with 0 dB gain, is 22 dBu.
Value space: Line/Microphone
Example: If your microphone has a maximum output level of -44 dBu, then you should set
the gain to 22 dBu - (-44 dBu) = 66 dB.
Microphone: Select Microphone if your input source requires 48 V phantom power to
operate.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Line: Select Line if 48 V phantom power is not required or desired for correct operation.
Default value: 58
Value space: Integer (0..70)
Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation
MuteOnInactiveVideo
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
n: 1..8
Audio Input Microphone [n] Mode
Disable or enable audio on the microphone connector.
The microphone can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and
you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is
presented or not. By default, audio is not muted.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
n: 1..8
Default value: On
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: No video source is associated.
Off: Disable the audio input microphone connector.
On: A video source is associated, and the audio will be muted if the associated video
source is not displayed.
On: Enable the audio input microphone connector.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
137
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [n] Mode
n: 1..8
n: 1..8
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Default value: 1
Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each microphone. The
signals from all microphones with Mode = On will be mixed and fed to the selected
MicrophoneReinforcement outputs. Also consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement
Output Line Mode setting.
Value space: 1/2/3/4
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Value space: Off/On
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
On: The microphone signal will be fed to the selected MicrophoneReinforcement
outputs, as well as to the far end.
Define the microphone mute behavior on the video system.
Off: The microphone signal will be sent only to the far end. It will not be fed to the
selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: True
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [n] Mode
Value space: True/InCallOnly
True: Muting of audio is always available.
n: 1..4
InCallOnly: Muting of audio is only available when the device is in a call. When Idle it is
not possible to mute the microphone. This is useful when an external telephone service/
audio system is connected via the codec and is to be available when the codec is not
in a call. When set to InCallOnly this will prevent the audio-system from being muted by
mistake.
Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each line output. If Mode = On, the
line output will add the microphone reinforcement mix to its ordinary output signal. Also
consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone Mode setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
On: This output will deliver far end audio, local presentation audio and the microphone
reinforcement mix.
Off: This output will deliver far end audio and local presentation audio.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
138
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode
The gain (in dB) that will be applied to the mixed microphone signal that is fed to the
selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Define whether or not to use the video system's integrated speakers. You can limit their
use to play only ultrasound. The Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode setting for the integrated
monitor(s) must be set to On in order to play any audio on the integrated speakers.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: -54
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (-54..15)
Value space: Off/On/UltrasoundOnly
Use this gain to adjust the level of microphone signal that should be fed to the local
output. The value -54 means "Off", and no signal will be fed from the microphone to the
output.
Off: Disable the video system's integrated speakers.
On: Enable the video system's integrated speakers.
UltrasoundOnly: Enable the video system's integrated speakers only for ultrasound.
Audio Output HDMI [n] Level
n: 1..1 for single screen systems; 1..2 for dual screen systems
Audio Output Line [n] Channel
Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
n: 1..6
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether the Audio Line output is a mono signal or part of a multichannel signal.
Default value: 0
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Default value: Line [1,3,5]: Left Line [2,4,6]: Right
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Value space: Left/Mono/Right
Left: The Audio Line output signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode
Mono: The Audio Line output signal is a mono signal.
Right: The Audio Line output signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
n: 1..1 for single screen systems; 1..2 for dual screen systems
Define if the audio channel on this HDMI output connector shall be enabled.
Audio Output Line [n] Delay DelayMs
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
n: 1..6
Default value: On
To obtain lip-synchronization, you can configure each audio line output with an extra delay
that compensates for delay in other connected devices, for example TVs and external
loudspeakers. The delay that you set here is either fixed or relative to the delay on the HDMI
output, as defined in the Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode setting.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The connector will not be used for audio out.
On: The connector will be used for audio out.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..290)
The delay in milliseconds.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
139
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode
Audio Output Line [n] Level
n: 1..6
n: 1..6
You may add extra delay to an audio line output with the Audio Output Line [n] Delay
DelayMs setting. The extra delay added is either a fixed number of milliseconds, or
a number of milliseconds relative to the detected delay on the HDMI output (typically
introduced by the connected TV).
Set the gain on the Line output connector. The gain should be adjusted to fit the audio input
level of the connected device. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
The maximum output level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Example: If he connected audio device has max input level 10 dBu, then you should set the
gain to 10 dBu - 22 dBu = -12 dB.
Default value: Fixed
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Fixed/RelativeToHDMI
Default value: -10
Fixed: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be a fixed number of
millisecond.
Value space: Integer (-24..0)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
RelativeToHDMI: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be relative to the
detected delay on the HDMI output. The actual delay is HDMI-delay + DelayMs. The
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs status reports the actual delay.
Audio Output Line [n] Mode
n: 1..6
Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer ID
Define the mode for the audio line output.
n: 1..6
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Select the equalizer ID for the audio source that is connected to the output line.
Default value: On
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Off/On
Default value: 1
Off: Disable the audio line output.
On: Enable the audio line output.
Value space: Integer (1..8)
Set the equalizer ID.
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone
Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer Mode
Define which ringtone to use for incoming calls.
n: 1..6
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the line output.
Default value: Sunrise
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Sunrise/Mischief/Ripples/Reflections/Vibes/Delight/Evolve/Playful/Ascent/
Calculation/Mellow/Ringer
Default value: Off
Select a ringtone from the list.
Value space: Off/On
Off: No equalizer.
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio line output.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
140
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume
Define the ring volume for incoming calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: 30
Value space: Integer (0..100)
Range: The value goes in steps of 5 from 0 to 100 (from -34.5 dB to 15 dB). Volume 0 =
Off.
Audio Ultrasound Mode
This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Keep the setting at its default value.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Dynamic
Value space: Dynamic/Static
Dynamic: The video system adjusts the ultrasound volume dynamically. The volume may
vary up to the maximum level as defined in the Audio Ultrasound Volume MaxVolume
setting.
Static: Use only if advised by Cisco.
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Set the maximum volume of the
ultrasound pairing message.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 66
Value space: Integer (0..90)
Select a value in the specified range. If set to 0, the ultrasound is switched off.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
141
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
CallHistory settings
CallHistory Mode
Determine whether or not information about calls that are placed or received are stored,
including missed calls and calls that are not answered (call history). This determines
whether or not the calls appear in the Recents list in the user interfaces.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: New entries are not added to the call history.
On: New entries are stored in the call history list.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
142
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Cameras settings
Cameras Camera [n] AssignedSerialNumber
Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode
n: 1..7
n: 1..7
The camera ID is the number n in Camera [n]. By default, the camera ID is assigned
automatically to a camera. If EDID information is not passed on from the camera to the
codec, the camera ID is not persistent after a reboot. This means that a camera may get a
new camera ID when the codec (video system) is restarted.
Define the camera brightness mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
You should use the Cameras Camera AssignedSerialNumber setting to cater for
configurations where the codec does not receive EDID information from multiple cameras.
This setting allows you to manually assign a camera ID to a camera by associating the
camera ID with the camera's serial number. The setting is persistent until the codec is
factory reset.
Value space: Auto/Manual
Auto: The camera brightness is automatically set by the system.
Manual: Enable manual control of the camera brightness. The brightness level is set
using the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel setting.
Typical situations where the codec does not receive EDID information are: when you
connect a Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera using 3G-SDI; when you connect a
Cisco TelePresence Precision 40 (Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p4xS2) camera;
when you use an HDMI repeater that does not pass on EDID information.
Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel
n: 1..7
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Define the brightness level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode to be set to
Manual.
Value space: String (0, 20)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The camera's serial number.
Default value: 20
Value space: Integer (1..31)
Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode
The brightness level.
n: 1..7
This configuration turns backlight compensation on or off. Backlight compensation is
useful when there is much light behind the persons in the room. Without compensation the
persons will easily appear very dark to the far end.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Turn off the camera backlight compensation.
On: Turn on the camera backlight compensation.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
143
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras Camera [n] Flip
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode
n: 2..7 for single camera systems; 3..7 for dual camera systems
n: 1..7
With Flip mode (vertical flip) you can flip the image upside down. Flipping applies both to
the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end.
This setting enables gamma corrections. Gamma describes the nonlinear relationship
between image pixels and monitor brightness.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Value space: Auto/Manual
Auto: If the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image is automatically
flipped. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside down or not, the
image is not changed.
Auto: Auto is the default and the recommended setting.
Manual: In manual mode the gamma value is changed with the gamma level setting, ref.
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level.
Off: Display the image on screen the normal way.
On: Display the image flipped upside down. This setting is used when a camera is
mounted upside down, but cannot automatically detect which way it is mounted.
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level
n: 1..7
Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode
Define the camera focus mode.
By setting the Gamma Level you can select which gamma correction table to use. This
setting may be useful in difficult lighting conditions, where changes to the brightness setting
does not provide satisfactory results. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode to be
set to Manual.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
n: 2..7 for single camera systems; 3..7 for dual camera systems
Default value: Auto
Default value: 0
Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual
Value space: Integer (0..7)
Define the gamma level.
Auto: The camera will do continuous auto focusing. It will, more specifically, run auto
focus once a call is connected, after pan, tilt, zoom have changed, and generally when
the camera identifies a change in the scene.
AutoLimited: In most cases this mode will operate the same way as Auto. In some cases
AutoLimited will reduce the focus hunting that may occur. Problematic scenes have large
areas with no or low contrast, for instance a painted wall with no details, or maybe a
partly empty whiteboard. There’s a slightly higher chance of background focus with this
mode, compared to Auto.
Manual: Turn the autofocus off and adjust the camera focus manually.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
144
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Cameras Camera [n] Mirror
Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode
n: 2..7 for single camera systems; 3..7 for dual camera systems
n: 1..7
With Mirror mode (horizontal flip) you can mirror the image on screen. Mirroring applies both
to the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end. Mirroring is automatically
disabled when speaker tracking is on.
Define the camera white balance mode.
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/Manual
Default value: Auto
Auto: The camera will continuously adjust the white balance depending on the camera
view.
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Auto: For the integrated cameras, the image is always displayed as other people see
you. For other cameras, if the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image
is automatically mirrored. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside
down or not, the image is not changed.
Manual: Enables manual control of the camera white balance. The white balance level is
set using the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level setting.
Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level
Off: For integrated cameras, display the image as you see yourself in a mirror; for other
cameras, display the image as other people see you.
n: 1..7
On: For integrated cameras, display the image as other people see you; for other
cameras, display the image as you see yourself in a mirror.
Define the white balance level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode to be
set to manual.
Cameras Camera [n] MotorMoveDetection
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
n: 1..7
Default value: 1
This setting applies only when using a Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p12x camera.
Value space: Integer (1..16)
The white balance level.
If adjusting the camera position by hand you can configure whether the camera should keep
its new position or return to the preset or position it had before.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: When the camera position is adjusted manually the camera will keep this position
until adjusted again. WARNING: If you manually tilt the camera, the camera will not
register the new pan and tilt values since there is no position feedback. This will result in
wrong pan and tilt values when recalling the camera presets subsequently.
On: When the camera position is adjusted manually, or the camera detects that the
motors have moved, it will first re-initialize (i.e. go to default position) then return to the
preset/position it had before the camera was adjusted.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
145
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Cameras PowerLine Frequency
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom
If your camera supports power line frequency anti-flickering, the camera is able to
compensate for any flicker noise from the electrical power supply. You should set this
camera configuration based on your power line frequency. If your camera supports auto
detection of line frequency, you can select the Auto option in the configuration.
Define the zoom position that the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature
is activated. Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support
presenter tracking
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
All Cisco Precision cameras support both anti-flickering and auto detection of line
frequency. Auto is the default value, so you should change this setting if you have a camera
that does not support auto detection.
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The zoom position.
Default value: Auto
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector
Value space: 50Hz/60Hz/Auto
50Hz: Use this value when the power line frequency is 50 Hz.
Define which video input connector the presenter tracking camera is connected to. Only the
Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter tracking.
60Hz: Use this value when the power line frequency is 60 Hz.
Auto: Allow the camera to detect the power frequency automatically.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan
Value space: Integer (1..5)
Define the pan position that the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature
is activated. Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support
presenter tracking.
The video input connector.
Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Define whether or not the PresenterTrack feature is available for use. Only the Precision 60
camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter tracking.
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The pan position.
Default value: False
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt
Value space: False/True
False: The PresenterTrack feature is disabled.
Define the tilt position that the presenter tracking camera will move to when the feature is
activated. Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support
presenter tracking.
True: The PresenterTrack feature is available for use.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (-65535..65535)
The tilt position.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
146
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus
Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus
Define whether to enable or disable automatic switching between the Remote Presenter
and Local Presenter modes in the Briefing room scenario (Room Type templates). Automatic
switching implies that the system switches to Local Presenter mode when a person is
detected in the PresenterTrack trigger zone, and that the system switches back to the
Remote Presenter mode when the local presenter leaves the stage.
The current position (pan and tilt), zoom and focus are stored with a preset. Use this setting
to determine if the camera should refocus or use the focus value that is stored with the
preset.
If this setting is enabled, the Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected status will be
updated when a new person enters the trigger zone.
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter
tracking.
Auto: Whether the camera refocuses or not when selecting a preset, depends on the
camera type.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Enabled
Off: The focus value that is stored with the preset will be used. The camera will not
refocus when selecting a preset.
Value space: Disabled/Enabled
On: The camera will refocus when selecting a preset. The focus value that is stored with
the preset may be overridden.
Disabled: No automatic switching between modes.
Enabled: Automatic switching between the Local Presenter and Remote Presenter
modes.
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
This setting applies only to systems with dual cameras.
Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone
The dual camera assembly consists of two cameras and uses an audio tracking technique
that finds and captures a close-up of the active speaker. When a change of speaker is
detected, the system can switch automatically between the two cameras to always show
the best camera view. Refer to the Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode setting for
different switching modes.
Define the trigger zone, which corresponds to the area where a person's face must be
detected for presenter tracking to start.
The format is a string of x and y coordinate pairs: "x1,y1,...xn,yn", where the range of x is
(0,1920) and y is (0,1080). Two coordinate pairs define the upper left and lower right corner
of a rectangular trigger zone. More than two coordinate pairs define the vertices of a
polygonal trigger zone.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Only the Precision 60 camera and the video system's internal camera support presenter
tracking.
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: Speaker tracking is switched on. The system will detect people in the room and
automatically select the best camera framing. Users can switch speaker track on or off
instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller, but the feature is switched
back on after each call so that the system is ready for the next user.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Off: Speaker tracking is switched off, and the two cameras operate as individual
cameras.
Value space: String (0..255)
The coordinates for the trigger zone.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
147
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight
This setting applies only when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto.
Not applicable in this version.
When a person in the room speaks the system will find the person and select the best
camera framing. This is called a closeup and may not include all the persons in the room.
If you want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times you can turn off the
closeup functionality.
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
This setting applies only to systems with dual cameras.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker tracking functionality, thus you
need a camera that supports speaker tracking. When a presenter is standing next to the
whiteboard, the camera will capture both the presenter and the whiteboard if the Snap to
Whiteboard feature is enabled. If the feature is disabled, only the presenter will be captured.
The Snap to Whiteboard feature is set up from the Touch controller or web interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: The system will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The system will keep all the persons in the room in the camera framing at all times.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Off
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode
Value space: Off/On
Off: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is disabled.
This setting applies only to systems with a dual camera (speaker tracking), and when
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto.
On: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is enabled.
The speaker tracking algorithm can react to changes in two modes, one faster than the
other. The mode determines when the camera view will change to a new speaker.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Conservative
Auto: This is the normal tracking mode.
Conservative: The camera view will change to a new speaker later than in normal
tracking mode.
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode
Not applicable in this version.
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft
Not applicable in this version.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
148
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference settings
Conference ActiveControl Mode
Conference AutoAnswer Mute
Active control is a feature that allows conference participants to administer a conference on
Cisco TelePresence Server or Cisco Meeting Server using the video system's interfaces.
Each user can see the participant list, change video layout, disconnect participants, etc.
from the interface. The active control feature is enabled by default, provided that it is
supported by the infrastructure (Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) version
9.1.2 or newer, Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS) version X8.1 or
newer, Cisco Media Server (CMS) version 2.1 or newer). Change this setting if you want to
disable the active control features.
Define if the microphone shall be muted when an incoming call is automatically answered.
Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The incoming call will not be muted.
On: The incoming call will be muted when automatically answered.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Conference AutoAnswer Delay
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: Active control is enabled when supported by the infrastructure.
Define how long (in seconds) an incoming call has to wait before it is answered
automatically by the system. Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
Off: Active control is disabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Conference AutoAnswer Mode
Default value: 0
Define the auto answer mode. Use the Conference AutoAnswer Delay setting if you want
the system to wait a number of seconds before answering the call, and use the Conference
AutoAnswer Mute setting if you want your microphone to be muted when the call is
answered.
Value space: Integer (0..50)
The auto answer delay (seconds).
Conference CallProtocolIPStack
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Select if the system should enable IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack on the call protocol (SIP,
H323).
Value space: Off/On
Off: You can answer incoming calls manually by tapping Answer on the Touch controller.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: The system automatically answers incoming calls, except if you are already in a call.
You can answer or decline incoming calls manually when you are already engaged in a
call.
Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6
Default value: Dual
Dual: Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 for the call protocol.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the call protocol will use IPv4.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the call protocol will use IPv6.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
149
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference DefaultCall Protocol
Conference Encryption Mode
Define the Default Call Protocol to be used when placing calls from the system.
Define the conference encryption mode. A padlock with the text "Encryption On" or
"Encryption Off" displays on screen for a few seconds when the conference starts.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
NOTE: If the Encryption Option Key is not installed on the video system, the encryption
mode is always Off.
Value space: Auto/H320/H323/Sip/Spark
Requires user role: ADMIN
Auto: Enables auto-selection of the call protocol based on which protocols are available.
If multiple protocols are available, the order of priority is: 1) SIP; 2) H323; 3) H320. If the
system cannot register, the auto-selection chooses H323.
Default value: BestEffort
Value space: Off/On/BestEffort
H320: All calls are set up as H.320 calls (only applicable if used with Cisco TelePresence
ISDN Link).
Off: The system will not use encryption.
H323: All calls are set up as H.323 calls.
BestEffort: The system will use encryption whenever possible.
On: The system will only allow calls that are encrypted.
Sip: All calls are set up as SIP calls.
> In Point to point calls: If the far end system supports encryption (AES-128), the call will
be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
Spark: Reserved for Webex registered systems. Do not use.
> In MultiSite calls: In order to have encrypted MultiSite conferences, all sites must
support encryption. If not, the conference will be unencrypted.
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Define the Default Call Rate to be used when placing calls from the system.
Conference FarEndControl Mode
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 6000
Lets you decide if the remote side (far end) should be allowed to select your video sources
and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
Requires user role: ADMIN
The default call rate (kbps).
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
Off: The far end is not allowed to select your video sources or to control your local
camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
This setting determines the default duration of a Do Not Disturb session, i.e. the period
when incoming calls are rejected and registered as missed calls. The session can be
terminated earlier by using the user interface.
On: Allows the far end to be able to select your video sources and control your local
camera (pan, tilt, zoom). You will still be able to control your camera and select your
video sources as normal.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 60
Value space: Integer (1..1440)
The number of minutes (maximum 1440 minutes = 24 hours) before the Do Not Disturb
session times out automatically.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
150
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability
Conference MaxTransmitCallRate
Define the far end control (H.224) signal capability mode.
Default value: On
Define the maximum transmit bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.
Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference
MaxTotalTransmitCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active
calls.
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Off: Disable the far end control signal capability.
Default value: 6000
On: Enable the far end control signal capability.
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum transmitt call rate (kbps).
Conference FarEndMessage Mode
Toggle whether it is allowed to send data between two codecs in a point-to-point call, for
use with control systems or macros. Works with SIP calls only. This setting will enable/
disable the use of the xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send command.
Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum overall receive bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly among
all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or downspeeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a
call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.
This configuration applies when using a video system's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to
host a multipoint video conference.
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
The maximum receive bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
MaxReceiveCallRate setting.
Off: It is not possible to send messages between two codecs.
On: It is possible to send messages between two codecs in a point-to-point call.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Conference MaxReceiveCallRate
Default value: 6000
Define the maximum receive bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls.
Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference
MaxTotalReceiveCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active
calls.
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 6000
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
151
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate
Conference Multipoint Mode
This configuration applies when using a video system's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to
host a multipoint video conference.
Define how the video system handles multiparty video conferences (ad hoc conferences).
If registered to a Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS), the video system
can use its own built-in MultiSite feature. If registered to a Cisco Unified Communications
Manager (CUCM) version 8.6.2 or newer, the video system can use either the CUCM
conference bridge, or the video system's own built-in MultiSite feature. Which option to use,
is set-up by CUCM.
Define the maximum overall transmit bit rate allowed. The bit rate will be divided fairly
among all active calls at any time. This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or
down-speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or
when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed.
The maximum transmit bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
MaxTransmitCallRate setting.
The CUCM conference bridge allows you to set up conferences with many participants. The
built-in MultiSite allows up to five participants (yourself included) plus one additional audio
call.
Requires user role: ADMIN
The built-in MultiSite is optional and may not be available on all video systems.
Default value: 6000
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Integer (64..6000)
Default value: Auto
The maximum transmit call rate (kbps).
Value space: Auto/CUCMMediaResourceGroupList/MultiSite/Off
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode
Auto: The multipoint method is selected automatically; if no multipoint method is
available, the Multipoint Mode will be set to Off.
Define if the microphones shall be unmuted automatically when all calls are disconnected.
In a meeting room or other shared resources this may be done to prepare the system for
the next user.
CUCMMediaResourceGroupList: Multiparty conferences are hosted by the CUCM
configured conference bridge. This setting is provisioned by CUCM in a CUCM
environment, and should never be set manually by the user.
MultiSite: Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature. If
MultiSite is selected when the MultiSite feature is not available, the Multipoint Mode will
automatically be set to Off.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Off: Multiparty conferences are not allowed.
Value space: Off/On
Off: If muted during a call, let the microphones remain muted after the call is
disconnected.
Conference MultiStream Mode
On: Unmute the microphones after the call is disconnected.
The video system supports multistream video for conferences.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Off
Auto: Multistream will be used when the conference infrastructure supports the feature.
Minimum versions required: CMS 2.2, CUCM 11.5, VCS X8.7.
Off: Multistream is disabled.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
152
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode
Conference Presentation RelayQuality
Select whether or not to allow incoming calls when already in a call/conference.
This configuration applies to video systems that are using the built-in MultiSite feature
(optional) to host a multipoint video conference. When a remote user shares a presentation,
the video system will transcode the presentation and send it to the other participants in the
multipoint conference. The RelayQuality setting specifies whether to give priority to high
frame rate or to high resolution for the presentation source.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Allow
Value space: Allow/Deny
Requires user role: ADMIN
Allow: You will be notified when someone calls you while you are already in a call.
You can accept the incoming call or not. The ongoing call may be put on hold while
answering the incoming call; or you may merge the calls (requires support for multiparty
video conferences).
Default value: Sharpness
Value space: Motion/Sharpness
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher
frame rates, typically when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
Deny: An incoming call will be rejected if you are already in a call. You will not be notified
about the incoming call. However, the call will appear as a missed call in the call history
list.
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest
quality of detailed images and graphics.
Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold
Conference VideoBandwidth Mode
Define whether or not to continue sharing a presentation after the remote site has put you
on hold.
Define the conference video bandwidth mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: NoAction
Default value: Dynamic
Value space: NoAction/Stop
Value space: Dynamic/Static
NoAction: The video system will not stop the presentation sharing when put on hold. The
presentation will not be shared while you are on hold, but it will continue automatically
when the call is resumed.
Dynamic: The available transmit bandwidth for the video channels are distributed among
the currently active channels. If there is no presentation, the main video channels will
use the bandwidth of the presentation channel.
Stop: The video system stops the presentation sharing when the remote site puts you on
hold. The presentation will not continue when the call is resumed.
Static: The available transmit bandwidth is assigned to each video channel, even if it is
not active.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
153
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
FacilityService settings
FacilityService Service [n] Type
FacilityService Service [n] Number
n: 1..5
n: 1..5
Up to five different facility services can be supported simultaneously. With this setting you
can select what kind of services they are. A facility service is not available unless both the
FacilityService Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are
properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface.
Define the number (URI or phone number) of the facility service. Up to five different facility
services are supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService
Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set.
Facility services are available from the user interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Helpdesk
Default value: ""
Value space: Catering/Concierge/Emergency/Helpdesk/Security/Transportation/Other
Value space: String (0, 1024)
Catering: Select this option for catering services.
The number (URI or phone number) of the facility service.
Concierge: Select this option for concierge services.
Emergency: Select this option for emergency services.
FacilityService Service [n] CallType
Helpdesk: Select this option for helpdesk services.
n: 1..5
Security: Select this option for security services.
Define the call type for each facility service. Up to five different facility services are
supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n]
Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services
are available from the user interface.
Transportation: Select this option for transportation services.
Other: Select this option for services not covered by the other options.
FacilityService Service [n] Name
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
n: 1..5
Default value: Video
Define the name of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported.
A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n] Name and the
FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. The name will show on the
facility service call button, which appears when you tap the question mark icon in the top
bar. Facility services are available from the user interface.
Value space: Audio/Video
Audio: Select this option for audio calls.
Video: Select this option for video calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Service 1: "Live Support" Other services: ""
Value space: String (0, 1024)
The name of the facility service.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
154
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
GPIO settings
GPIO Pin [n] Mode
n: 1..4
The four GPIO pins are configured individually. The state can be retrieved by xStatus GPIO
Pin [1..4] State. The default pin state is High (+12 V). When activated as an output, a pin is
set to 0 V (Low); when deactivated, it is set to +12 V (High). To activate a pin as an input, the
voltage on the pin must be pulled down to 0 V; to deactivate it, raise the voltage to +12 V.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: InputNoAction
Value space: InputAcceptAllCalls/InputDisconnectAllCalls/InputMuteMicrophones/
InputNoAction/OutputAllCallsEncrypted/OutputInCall/OutputManualState/
OutputMicrophonesMuted/OutputPresentationOn/OutputStandbyActive
InputAcceptAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Accept command,
which accepts all incoming calls, will be issued.
InputDisconnectAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Disconnect
command, which disconnects all calls, will be issued.
InputMuteMicrophones: When the pin is activated, the microphones will be muted. When
deactivated, the microphones will be unmuted.
InputNoAction: The pin state can be set, but no operation is performed.
OutputAllCallsEncrypted: The pin is activated when all calls are encrypted, and
deactivated when one or more calls are not encrypted.
OutputInCall: The pin is activated when in call, and deactivated when not in call.
OutputManualState: The pin state can be set by xCommand GPIO ManualState Set PinX:
High/Low. It is set to +12 V or 0 V, respectively.
OutputMicrophonesMuted: The pin is activated when microphones are muted, and
deactivated when not muted.
OutputPresentationOn: The pin is activated when presentation is active, and deactivated
when presentation is not active.
OutputStandbyActive: The pin is activated when the system is in standby mode, and
deactivated when no longer in standby.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
155
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
H323 settings
H323 Authentication Mode
H323 Authentication Password
Define the authenticatin mode for the H.323 profile.
The system sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication
Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way
authentication from the codec to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the system is authenticated to
the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the
system will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Off: The system will not try to authenticate itself to a H.323 Gatekeeper, but will still try a
normal registration.
Default value: ""
On: If an H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that it requires authentication, the system will try
to authenticate itself to the gatekeeper. Requires the H323 Authentication LoginName
and H323 Authentication Password settings to be defined on both the codec and the
Gatekeeper.
Value space: String (0, 50)
The authentication password.
H323 CallSetup Mode
H323 Authentication LoginName
Defines whether to use a Gatekeeper or Direct calling when establishing H.323 calls.
Direct H.323 calls can be made also when H323 CallSetup Mode is set to Gatekeeper.
The system sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication
Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way
authentication from the codec to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the system is authenticated to
the gatekeeper. If the H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the
system will still try to register. Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Gatekeeper
Value space: Direct/Gatekeeper
Requires user role: ADMIN
Direct: You can only make an H.323 call by dialing an IP address directly.
Default value: ""
Gatekeeper: The system uses a Gatekeeper to make an H.323 call. When choosing this
option, the H323 Gatekeeper Address must also be configured.
Value space: String (0, 50)
The authentication login name.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
156
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
H323 Encryption KeySize
H323 H323Alias ID
Define the minimum or maximum key size for the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method,
which is used when establishing the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption key.
Define the H.323 Alias ID, which is used to address the system on a H.323 Gatekeeper and
will be displayed in the call lists.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Min1024bit
Default value: ""
Value space: Max1024bit/Min1024bit/Min2048bit
Value space: String (0, 49)
Max1024bit: The maximum size is 1024 bit.
The H.323 Alias ID. Example: "[email protected]", "My H.323 Alias ID"
Min1024bit: The minimum size is 1024 bit.
Min2048bit: The minimum size is 2048 bit.
H323 NAT Mode
The firewall traversal technology creates a secure path through the firewall barrier, and
enables proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video
conferencing system (when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). NOTE: NAT does not
work in conjunction with gatekeepers.
H323 Gatekeeper Address
Define the IP address of the Gatekeeper. Requires H323 CallSetup Mode to be set to
Gatekeeper.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Default value: ""
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Value space: String (0, 255)
Auto: The system will determine if the H323 NAT Address or the real IP address should
be used in signaling. This makes it possible to place calls to endpoints on the LAN as
well as endpoints on the WAN. If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, the real IP
address will be used.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
H323 H323Alias E164
Off: The system will signal the real IP address.
The H.323 Alias E.164 defines the address of the system, according to the numbering plan
implemented in the H.323 Gatekeeper. The E.164 alias is equivalent to a telephone number,
sometimes combined with access codes.
On: The system will signal the configured H323 NAT Address instead of its real IP
address in Q.931 and H.245. The NAT server address will be shown in the startup-menu
as: "My IP Address: 10.0.2.1". If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, H.323 calls
cannot be set up.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 30)
The H.323 Alias E.164 address. Valid characters are 0-9, * and #.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
157
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
H323 NAT Address
Define the external/global IP address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the
router will then be routed to the system. Note that NAT cannot be used when registered to
a gatekeeper.
In the router, the following ports must be routed to the system's IP address:
* Port 1720
* Port 5555-6555
* Port 2326-2487
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
H323 PortAllocation
This setting affects the H.245 port numbers used for H.323 call signaling.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Dynamic
Value space: Dynamic/Static
Dynamic: The system will allocate which ports to use when opening a TCP connection.
The reason for doing this is to avoid using the same ports for subsequent calls, as some
firewalls consider this as a sign of attack. When Dynamic is selected, the H.323 ports
used are from 11000 to 20999. Once 20999 is reached they restart again at 11000.
The ports are automatically selected by the system within the given range. Firewall
administrators should not try to deduce which ports are used when, as the allocation
schema within the mentioned range may change without any further notice.
Static: When set to Static the ports are given within a static predefined range [55556555].
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
158
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
HttpClient settings
HttpClient Mode
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS
Allow or prohibit communication with an external HTTP(S) server using HTTP(S) requests
and responses.
You can choose whether or not to allow the video system to communicate with a server
over HTTPS without checking the server's certificate first.
Even if the video system is allowed to skip the certificate validation process, it doesn't
automatically do it. You must specifically set the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter in
each xCommand HttpClient command for data to be exchanged with the server without
certificate validation.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The video system cannot communicate with an external HTTP(S) server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: The video system is allowed to communicate with an external HTTP(S) server.
Default value: False
Value space: False/True
HttpClient AllowHTTP
False: The video system always checks that the HTTPS server has a valid certificate. No
communication with the server takes place if the certificate validation fails.
The HttpClient Mode setting is used to allow or prohibit communication with an external
HTTP(S) server. The Mode setting does not distinguish between HTTP and HTTPS. You
must use the HttpClient AllowHTTP setting to further allow or prohibit the use of HTTP.
True: The video system is allowed to skip the certificate validation process before
communicating with the server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: True
Value space: False/True
False: The video system can communicate only over HTTPS.
True: The video system can communicate over both HTTPS and HTTP.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
159
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Logging settings
Logging External Mode
Logging External Server Port
Determine whether or not to store the system logs on a remote syslog server. This setting
has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.
The port that the remote syslog server listens for messages on. If set to 0, the video system
will use the standard syslog port. The standard syslog port is 514 for syslog, and 6514 for
syslog over TLS.
You must enter the address of the remote server in the Logging External Server Address
setting. Unless otherwise specified in the Logging External Server Port setting, the standard
syslog port is used.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 514
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
Default value: Off
The number of the port that the remote syslog server is using. 0 means that the video
system uses the standard syslog port.
Value space: Off/On
Off: System logs will not be stored on the remote syslog server.
On: System logs will be stored on the remote syslog server.
Logging Internal Mode
Determine whether or not to store the system logs on the video system (local files). These
are the files that you get when you download the log bundles from the video system. This
setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.
Logging External Protocol
Determine which protocol to use toward the remote logging server. You can use either the
syslog protocol over TLS (Transport Layer Security), or the syslog protocol in plaintext. For
details about the syslog protocol, see RFC 5424.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Off/On
Default value: SyslogTLS
Off: System logs will not be stored on the video system.
On: System logs will be stored on the video system.
Value space: Syslog/SyslogTLS
Syslog: Syslog protocol in plain text.
SyslogTLS: Syslog protocol over TLS.
Logging Mode
Define the logging mode for the video system (syslog service). When disabled, the syslog
service does not start, and most of the systema and audit logs are not generated. The
Historical Logs and Call Logs are not affected.
Logging External Server Address
The address of the remote syslog server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Value space: String (0, 255)
Off: Disable the system logging service.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
On: Enable the system logging service.
160
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Macros settings
Macros Mode
Macros allow you to write snippets of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video
endpoint, thus creating custom behavior. Use of macros is disabled by default, but the first
time you open the Macro Editor you will be asked whether to enable use of macros on the
codec. Use this setting when you want to manually enable, or to permanently disable the
use of macros on the codec. You can disable the use of macros within the Macro Editor.
But this will not permanently disable macros from running, because every time the codec is
reset the macros will be re-enabled automatically.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Permanently disable the use of macros on this video system.
On: Enable the use of macros on this video system.
Macros AutoStart
All the macros run in a single process on the video endpoint, called the macro runtime. It
should be running by default, but you can choose to stop and start it manually. If you restart
the video system, the runtime will automatically start again if auto start is enabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The macro runtime will not start automatically after a restart of the video system.
On: The macro runtime will start automatically after a restart of the video system.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
161
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network settings
Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode
Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Domain Name System Security extensions (DNSSEC) is a set of extensions to DNS. It is
used to authenticate DNS replies for zones that are signed. It will still allow unsigned zones.
m: 1..3
Define the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to three addresses may be specified.
If the network addresses are unknown, contact your administrator or Internet Service
Provider.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: Off/On
Default value: ""
Off: Disable Domain Name System Security Extensions.
On: Enable Domain Name System Security Extensions.
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Network [n] DNS Domain Name
Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
The DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified
names.
The system can be connected to an IEEE 802.1X LAN network, with a port-based network
access control that is used to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks.
Example: If the DNS Domain Name is "company.com" and the name to lookup is
"MyVideoSystem", this will result in the DNS lookup "MyVideoSystem.company.com".
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Value space: String (0, 64)
Off: The 802.1X authentication is disabled.
The DNS domain name.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
On: The 802.1X authentication is enabled.
162
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify
Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Verification of the server-side certificate of an IEEE802.1x connection against the
certificates in the local CA-list when TLS is used. The CA-list must be uploaded to the
video system. This can be done from the web interface.
Define the user name for 802.1X authentication.
This setting takes effect only when Network [1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls is enabled (On).
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0, 64)
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The user name for 802.1X authentication.
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Network [n] IEEE8021X Password
Off: When set to Off, TLS connections are allowed without verifying the server-side
X.509 certificate against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no CA-list
has been uploaded to the codec.
n: 1..1
Define the password for 802.1X authentication.
On: When set to On, the server-side X.509 certificate will be validated against the local
CA-list for all TLS connections. Only servers with a valid certificate will be allowed.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate
Value space: String (0, 50)
n: 1..1
The password for 802.1X authentication.
Authentication using a private key/certificate pair during an IEEE802.1x connection. The
authentication X.509 certificate must be uploaded to the video system. This can be done
from the web interface.
Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity
n: 1..1
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off
The 802.1X Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) types that support different tunneled identity, like EAP-PEAP and
EAP-TTLS. If set, the anonymous ID will be used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity
Request.
Value space: Off/On
Off: When set to Off client-side authentication is not used (only server-side).
On: When set to On the client (video system) will perform a mutual authentication TLS
handshake with the server.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
The 802.1X Anonymous ID string.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
163
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Define the Md5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) mode. This is a Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol that relies on a shared secret. Md5 is a Weak security.
Define the Peap (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) mode. Authenticates LAN
clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Microsoft, Cisco and RSA
Security.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled.
Off: The EAP-PEAP protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled.
On: The EAP-PEAP protocol is enabled.
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls
n: 1..1
Network [n] IPStack
Define the TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) mode. Authenticates LAN clients
without the need for client certificates. Developed by Funk Software and Certicom. Usually
supported by Agere Systems, Proxim and Avaya.
Select if the system should use IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack, on the network interface. NOTE:
After changing this setting you may have to wait up to 30 seconds before it takes effect.
n: 1..1
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Default value: Dual
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Dual/IPv4/IPv6
Dual: When set to Dual, the network interface can operate on both IP versions at the
same time, and can have both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address at the same time.
Off: The EAP-TTLS protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-TTLS protocol is enabled.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the system will use IPv4 on the network interface.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the system will use IPv6 on the network interface.
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls
n: 1..1
Enable or disable the use of EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) for IEEE802.1x
connections. The EAP-TLS protocol, defined in RFC 5216, is considered one of the most
secure EAP standards. LAN clients are authenticated using client certificates.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The EAP-TLS protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-TLS protocol is enabled.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
164
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] IPv4 Assignment
Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Define how the system will obtain its IPv4 address, subnet mask and gateway address.
Define the IPv4 network subnet mask. Applicable only when the Network IPv4 Assignment
is set to Static.
When using DHCP for address assignment, "01" appended by the MAC address is used as
client identifier in DHCP requests.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: DHCP
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Static/DHCP
A valid IPv4 address.
Static: The addresses must be configured manually using the Network IPv4 Address,
Network IPv4 Gateway and Network IPv4 SubnetMask settings (static addresses).
Network [n] IPv6 Assignment
DHCP: The system addresses are automatically assigned by the DHCP server.
n: 1..1
Network [n] IPv4 Address
Define how the system will obtain its IPv6 address and the default gateway address.
n: 1..1
When using DHCPv6 for address assignment, "01" appended by the MAC address is used
as client identifier in DHCP requests.
Define the static IPv4 network address for the system. Applicable only when Network IPv4
Assignment is set to Static.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Autoconf
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: Static/DHCPv6/Autoconf
Default value: ""
Static: The codec and gateway IP addresses must be configured manually using the
Network IPv6 Address and Network IPv6 Gateway settings. The options, for example
NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6
server. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
DHCPv6: All IPv6 addresses, including options, will be obtained from a DHCPv6 server.
See RFC 3315 for a detailed description. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting will be
ignored.
Network [n] IPv4 Gateway
n: 1..1
Autoconf: Enable IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration of the IPv6 network interface. See
RFC 4862 for a detailed description. The options, for example NTP and DNS server
addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network
IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
Define the IPv4 network gateway address. Applicable only when the Network IPv4
Assignment is set to Static.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
165
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] IPv6 Address
Network [n] MTU
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Define the static IPv6 network address for the system. Applicable only when the Network
IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.
Define the Ethernet MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size. The MTU size must be
supported by your network infrastructure. The minimum size is 576 for IPv4 and 1280 for
IPv6.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: 1500
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Integer (576..1500)
A valid IPv6 address including a network mask. Example: 2001:DB8::/48
Set a value for the MTU (bytes).
Network [n] IPv6 Gateway
Network [n] QoS Mode
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Define the IPv6 network gateway address. This setting is only applicable when the Network
IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.
The QoS (Quality of Service) is a method which handles the priority of audio, video and
data in the network. The QoS settings must be supported by the infrastructure. Diffserv
(Differentiated Services) is a computer networking architecture that specifies a simple,
scalable and coarse-grained mechanism for classifying, managing network traffic and
providing QoS priorities on modern IP networks.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
A valid IPv6 address.
Default value: Diffserv
Value space: Off/Diffserv
Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions
Off: No QoS method is used.
n: 1..1
Diffserv: When you set the QoS Mode to Diffserv, the Network QoS Diffserv Audio,
Network QoS Diffserv Video, Network QoS Diffserv Data, Network QoS Diffserv
Signalling, Network QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 and Network QoS Diffserv NTP settings are
used to prioritize packets.
Retrieve a set of DHCP options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, from a
DHCPv6 server.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the retrieval of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
On: Enable the retrieval of a selected set of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
166
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Audio packets should have in the IP network.
Define which priority Data packets should have in the IP network.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended class for Audio is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in
doubt, contact your network administrator.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended value for Data is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt, contact
your network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the audio packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Set the priority of the data packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher
the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Video packets should have in the IP network. The packets on the
presentation channel (shared content) are also in the Video packet category. The priority
for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the priority. The
recommended class for Video is CS4, which equals the decimal value 32. If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
Define which priority Signalling packets that are deemed critical (time-sensitive) for the
real-time operation should have in the IP network.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended class for Signalling is CS3, which equals the decimal value 24. If
in doubt, contact your network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 0
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the video packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Set the priority of the signalling packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
167
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6
Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which IP addresses (IPv4/IPv6) are allowed for remote access to the codec from
SSH/Telnet/HTTP/HTTPS. Multiple IP addresses are separated by a white space.
Define which priority ICMPv6 packets should have in the IP network.
A network mask (IP range) is specified by <ip address>/N, where N is 1-32 for IPv4, and N
is 1-128 for IPv6. The /N is a common indication of a network mask where the first N bits
are set. Thus 192.168.0.0/24 would match any address starting with 192.168.0, since these
are the first 24 bits in the address.
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended value for ICMPv6 is 0, which means best effort. If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: 0
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Value space: Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the ICMPv6 packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the
higher the priority. 0 means "best effort".
Network [n] Speed
n: 1..1
Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP
Define the Ethernet link speed. We recommend not to change from the default value,
which negotiates with the network to set the speed automatically. If you do not use autonegotiation, make sure that the speed you choose is supported by the closest switch in
your network infrastructure.
n: 1..1
This setting will only take effect if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority NTP packets should have in the IP network.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The priority for the packets ranges from 0 to 63 - the higher the number, the higher the
priority. The recommended value for NTP is 0, which means "best effort". If in doubt,
contact your network administrator.
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/10half/10full/100half/100full/1000full
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled
by the local network administrator.
Auto: Auto-negotiate link speed.
10half: Force link to 10 Mbps half-duplex.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
10full: Force link to 10 Mbps full-duplex.
Default value: 0
100half: Force link to 100 Mbps half-duplex.
100full: Force link to 100 Mbps full-duplex.
Value space: Integer (0..63)
1000full: Force link to 1 Gbps full-duplex.
Set the priority of the NTP packets in the IP network - the higher the number, the higher
the priority. 0 means "best effort".
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
168
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Network [n] TrafficControl Mode
Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Define the network traffic control mode to decide how to control the video packets
transmission speed.
Define the VLAN voice ID. This setting will only take effect if Network VLAN Voice Mode is
set to Manual.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: On
Default value: 1
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Integer (1..4094)
Off: Transmit video packets at link speed.
Set the VLAN voice ID.
On: Transmit video packets at maximum 20 Mbps. Can be used to smooth out bursts in
the outgoing network traffic.
Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode
n: 1..1
Define the VLAN voice mode. The VLAN Voice Mode will be set to Auto automatically if you
have Cisco UCM (Cisco Unified Communications Manager) as provisioning infrastructure.
Note that Auto mode will NOT work if the NetworkServices CDP Mode setting is Off.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Manual/Off
Auto: The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), if available, assigns an id to the voice VLAN. If
CDP is not available, VLAN is not enabled.
Manual: The VLAN ID is set manually using the Network VLAN Voice VlanId setting. If
CDP is available, the manually set value will be overruled by the value assigned by CDP.
Off: VLAN is not enabled.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
169
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices settings
NetworkServices CDP Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Mode
Enable or disable the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) daemon. Enabling CDP will make the
endpoint report certain statistics and device identifiers to a CDP-enabled switch. If CDP is
disabled, the Network VLAN Voice Mode: Auto setting will not work.
Define whether or not to allow access to the video system using the HTTP or HTTPS (HTTP
Secure) protocols. Note that the video system's web interface use HTTP or HTTPS. If this
setting is switched Off, you cannot use the web interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN
For additional security (encryption and decryption of requests and pages that are returned
by the web server), allow only HTTPS.
Default value: On
Note: The default value is HTTP+HTTPS for video systems that have been upgraded to
CE9.4 (or later) from an earlier software version, provided that the video system has not
been factory reset after the upgrade.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The CDP daemon is disabled.
Requires user role: ADMIN
On: The CDP daemon is enabled.
Default value: HTTPS (changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS in CE9.4)
NetworkServices H323 Mode
Value space: Off/HTTP+HTTPS/HTTPS
Off: Access to the video system not allowed via HTTP or HTTPS.
Define whether the system should be able to place and receive H.323 calls or not.
HTTP+HTTPS: Access to the video system allowed via both HTTP and HTTPS.
Requires user role: ADMIN
HTTPS: Access to the video system allowed via HTTPS, but not via HTTP.
Default value: Off
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
This is the user name part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 80)
The authentication login name.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
170
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl
This is the password part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
Set the URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script. Requires that the
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to PACUrl.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: String (0..255)
The authentication password.
The URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script.
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode
The HTTP proxy for Cisco Webex can be set up manually, it can be auto-configured
(PACUrl), fully automated (WPAD), or it can be turned off.
Define the support for OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) responder services. The
OCSP feature allows users to enable OCSP instead of certificate revocation lists (CRLs) to
check the certificate status.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Off
For any outgoing HTTPS connection, the OCSP responder is queried of the status. If the
corresponding certificate has been revoked, then the HTTPS connection will not be used.
Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
Requires user role: ADMIN
Manual: Enter the address of the proxy server in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy
URL setting. Optionally, also add the HTTP proxy login name and password in the
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName/Password settings.
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The HTTP proxy mode is turned off.
Off: Disable OCSP support.
PACUrl: The HTTP proxy is auto-configured. You must enter the URL for the PAC (Proxy
Auto Configuration) script in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl setting.
On: Enable OCSP support.
WPAD: With WPAD (Web Proxy Auto Discovery) the HTTP proxy is fully automated and
auto-configured.
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL
Define the URL of the OCSP responder (server) that will be used to check the certificate
status.
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url
Set the URL of the HTTP proxy server. Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy
Mode is set to Manual.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: ""
A valid URL.
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
The URL of the HTTP proxy server.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
171
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
When the video system connects to a HTTPS client (like a web browser), the client can be
asked to present a certificate to the video system to identify itself.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: TLSv1.1
Default value: Off
Value space: TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Value space: Off/On
TLSv1.1: Support of TLS version 1.1 or higher.
Off: Do not verify client certificates.
TLSv1.2: Support of TLS version 1.2 or higher.
On: Requires the client to present a certificate that is signed by a trusted Certificate
Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the system in
advance.
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
The HTTP Strict Transport Security header lets a web site inform the browser that it should
never load the site using HTTP and should automatically convert all attempts to access the
site using HTTP to HTTPS requests instead.
NetworkServices NTP Mode
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the system's time and date to a
reference time server. The time server will be queried regularly for time updates.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Off/On
Default value: Auto
Off: The HTTP strict transport security feature is disabled.
Value space: Auto/Manual/Off
On: The HTTP strict transport security feature is enabled.
Auto: The system will use an NTP server for time reference. As default, the server
address will be obtained from the network's DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not used,
or if the DHCP server does not provide an NTP server address, the NTP server address
that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be used.
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate
When the video system connects to an external HTTPS server (like a phone book server
or an external manager), this server will present a certificate to the video system to identify
itself.
Manual: The system will use the NTP server that is specified in the NetworkServices
NTP Server [n] Address setting for time reference.
Off: The system will not use an NTP server. The NetworkServices NTP Server [n]
Address setting will be ignored.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: Do not verify server certificates.
On: Requires the system to verify that the server certificate is signed by a trusted
Certificate Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the
system in advance.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
172
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn
n: 1..3
n: 1..3
The address of the NTP server that will be used when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to
Manual, and when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to Auto and no address is supplied by
a DHCP server.
Choose the authentication hash function that the NTP server uses, and that the video
system must use to authenticate the time messages.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: "0.tandberg.pool.ntp.org"
Value space: None/SHA1/SHA256
Value space: String (0, 255)
None: The NTP server doesn't use a hash function.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
SHA1: The NTP server uses the SHA-1 hash function.
SHA256: The NTP server uses the SHA-256 hash function (from the SHA-2 family of
hash functions).
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key
n: 1..3
NetworkServices SIP Mode
To make sure that the NTP information comes from a trusted source, the video system must
know the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses. Use the NetworkServices NTP Server [n]
Key and NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId settings for the key and ID respectively.
Define whether the system should be able to place and receive SIP calls or not.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/On
Value space: String (0, 2045)
Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
The key, which is part of the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId
n: 1..3
To make sure that the NTP information comes from a trusted source, the video system must
know the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses. Use the NetworkServices NTP Server [n]
Key and NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId settings for the key and ID respectively.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 10)
The ID, which is part of the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
173
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices SNMP Mode
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used in network management systems
to monitor network-attached devices (routers, servers, switches, projectors, etc) for
conditions that warrant administrative attention. SNMP exposes management data in the
form of variables on the managed systems, which describe the system configuration. These
variables can then be queried (set to ReadOnly) and sometimes set (set to ReadWrite) by
managing applications.
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP Community. SNMP Community names
are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have a password (case
sensitive) in order to receive a response from the SNMP Agent in the codec. The default
password is "public". If you have the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite (TMS) you
must make sure the same SNMP Community is configured there too. NOTE: The SNMP
Community password is case sensitive.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ReadOnly
Default value: ""
Value space: Off/ReadOnly/ReadWrite
Value space: String (0, 50)
Off: Disable the SNMP network service.
The SNMP community name.
ReadOnly: Enable the SNMP network service for queries only.
ReadWrite: Enable the SNMP network service for both queries and commands.
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Contact.
NetworkServices SNMP Host [n] Address
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
n: 1..3
Default value: ""
Define the address of up to three SNMP Managers.
The system's SNMP Agent (in the codec) responds to requests from SNMP Managers (a PC
program etc.), for example about system location and system contact. SNMP traps are not
supported.
Value space: String (0, 50)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
The name of the SNMP system contact.
Default value: ""
Define the name of the Network Services SNMP System Location.
Value space: String (0..255)
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 50)
The name of the SNMP system location.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
174
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices SSH Mode
NetworkServices Telnet Mode
SSH (or Secure Shell) protocol can provide secure encrypted communication between the
codec and your local computer.
Telnet is a network protocol used on the Internet or Local Area Network (LAN) connections.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The Telnet protocol is disabled. This is the factory setting.
Off: The SSH protocol is disabled.
On: The Telnet protocol is enabled.
On: The SSH protocol is enabled.
NetworkServices UPnP Mode
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm
Fully disable UPnP (Universal Plug and Play), or enable UPnP for a short time period after
the video system has been switched on or restarted.
Choose the cryptographic algorithm that shall be used for the SSH host key. Choices
are RSA (Rivest–Shamir–Adleman) with 2048 bits keysize, ECDSA (Elliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm) with NIST curve P-384, and EdDSA (Edwards-curve Digital Signature
Algorithm) with ed25519 signature schema.
The default operation is that UPnP is enabled when you switch on or restart the video
system. Then UPnP is automatically disabled after the timeout period that is defined in the
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout setting. Use the video system's web interface to set the
timeout.
Requires user role: ADMIN
When UPnP is enabled, the video system advertises its presence on the network. The
advertisement permits a Touch controller to discover video systems automatically, and
you do not need to manually enter the video system's IP address in order to pair the Touch
controller.
Default value: RSA
Value space: ECDSA/RSA/ed25519
ECDSA: Use the ECDSA algorithm (nist-384p).
RSA: Use the RSA algorithm (2048 bits).
Requires user role: ADMIN
ed25519: Use the ed25519 algorithm.
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey
Off: UPnP is disabled. The video system does not advertise its presence, and you have
to enter the video system's IP address manually in order to pair a Touch controller to the
video system.
Secure Shell (SSH) public key authentication can be used to access the codec.
On: UPnP is enabled. The video system advertises its presence until the timeout period
expires.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The SSH public key is not allowed.
On: The SSH public key is allowed.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
175
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout
NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode
Define for how many seconds UPnP shall stay enabled after the video system is switched
on or restarted. The NetworkServices UPnP Mode setting must be On for this setting to
take any effect.
Enable or disable the video system's XML API. For security reasons this may be disabled.
Disabling the XML API will limit the remote manageability with for example TMS, which no
longer will be able to connect to the video system.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 600
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (0..3600)
Value space: Off/On
Range: Select a value between 0 and 3600 seconds.
Off: The XML API is disabled.
On: The XML API is enabled.
NetworkServices Websocket
It is possible to interact with the API of the video system over the WebSocket protocol,
both the insecure and secure versions (ws and wss). A WebSocket is tied to HTTP, so
that also HTTP or HTTPS must be enabled before you can use WebSockets (see the
NetworkServices HTTP Mode setting).
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: FollowHTTPService/Off
FollowHTTPService: Communication over the WebSocket protocol is allowed when
HTTP or HTTPS is enabled.
Off: Communication over the WebSocket protocol is not allowed.
NetworkServices WelcomeText
Choose which information the user should see when logging on to the codec through
Telnet/SSH.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The welcome text is: Login successful
On: The welcome text is: Welcome to <system name>; Software version; Software
release date; Login successful.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
176
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Peripherals settings
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience
Peripherals Profile Cameras
If the Touch controller is used in environments with considerable amounts of
electromagnetic noise present, you may experience an appearance of false signals—for
example as if someone tapped the Touch controller when obviously nobody did so. To cope
with this you may enable the EMC Resilience Mode.
Define the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video system.
This information is used by the video system's diagnostics service. If the number of
connected cameras does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an
inconsistency.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Default value: Minimum1
Value space: Off/On
Value space: NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7
Off: The EMC resilience is disabled.
NotSet: No camera check is performed.
On: The EMC resilience is enabled.
Minimum1: At least one camera should be connected to the video system.
0-7: Select the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video
system.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing
In order to use Cisco Touch 10 (touch panel) as user interface for the video system, Touch
10 must be either directly connected to the video system or paired to the video system via
LAN. The latter is referred to as remote pairing.
Peripherals Profile ControlSystems
Define if a third-party control system, for example Crestron or AMX, is expected to be
connected to the video system. This information is used by the video system's diagnostics
service. If the number of connected control systems does not match this setting, the
diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency. Note that only one third-party control
system is supported.
Remote pairing is allowed by default; you must switch this setting Off if you want to prevent
remote pairing.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
If set to 1, the control system must send heart beats to the video system using xCommand
Peripherals Pair and HeartBeat commands. Failing to do so will cause the in-room control
extensions to show a warning that the video system has lost connectivity to the control
system.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is not allowed.
On: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is allowed.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: NotSet
Value space: 1/NotSet
1: One third-party control system should be connected to the video system.
NotSet: No check for a third-party control system is performed.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
177
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels
Define the number of Cisco Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the
video system. This information is used by the video system's diagnostics service. If the
number of connected Touch controllers does not match this setting, the diagnostics service
will report it as an inconsistency.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Minimum1
Value space: NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5
NotSet: No touch panel check is performed.
Minimum1: At least one Cisco Touch controller should be connected to the video system.
0-5: Select the number of Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the
video system. Note that only one Cisco Touch controller is officially supported.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
178
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Phonebook settings
Phonebook Server [n] ID
Phonebook Server [n] Type
n: 1..1
n: 1..1
Define a name for the external phone book.
Select the phonebook server type.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Default value: Off
Value space: String (0, 64)
Value space: Off/CUCM/Spark/TMS/VCS
The name for the external phone book.
Off: Do not use a phonebook.
CUCM: The phonebook is located on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Spark: The phonebook is located in the Cisco Webex cloud service.
Phonebook Server [n] Pagination
TMS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite server.
n: 1..1
VCS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication
Server.
Configure if the phonebook server supports pagination (paging) or not. Pagination means
that the server supports consecutive searches, and these searches can be relative to an
offset. This allows the user interface to perform as many consecutive searches as required
to get the complete search result.
Phonebook Server [n] URL
If Pagination is Disabled the video system does a single search and returns a maximum
of 100 entries in the search result. It is not possible to scroll to any further search results
beyond that.
n: 1..1
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Enabled
Default value: ""
Value space: Disabled/Enabled
Value space: String (0..255)
Define the address (URL) to the external phone book server.
A valid address (URL) to the phone book server.
Disabled: The phonebook server does not support pagination. The video system does a
single search, and the maximum number of entries in the search result is 100.
Enabled: The phonebook server supports pagination.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
179
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Provisioning settings
Provisioning Connectivity
Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress
This setting controls how the device discovers whether it should request an internal or
external configuration from the provisioning server.
Default value: Auto
Only applicable when the endpoint is provisioned by Cisco Unified Communication Manager
(CUCM) and an alternate CUCM is available for redundancy. Define the address of the
alternate CUCM. If the main CUCM is not available, the endpoint will be provisioned by the
alternate CUCM. When the main CUCM is available again, the endpoint will be provisioned
by this CUCM.
Value space: Internal/External/Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Internal: Request internal configuration.
Default value: ""
External: Request external configuration.
Value space: String (0, 64)
Auto: Automatically discover using NAPTR queries whether internal or external
configurations should be requested. If the NAPTR responses have the "e" flag, external
configurations will be requested. Otherwise internal configurations will be requested.
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol
Provisioning ExternalManager Address
Define whether to use the HTTP (unsecure communication) or HTTPS (secure
communication) protocol when sending requests to the external manager / provisioning
system.
Define the IP Address or DNS name of the external manager / provisioning system.
If an External Manager Address (and Path) is configured, the system will send a message
to this address when starting up. When receiving this message the external manager /
provisioning system can return configurations/commands to the unit as a result.
The selected protocol must be enabled in the NetworkServices HTTP Mode setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
When using CUCM or TMS provisioning, the DHCP server can be set up to provide the
external manager address automatically (DHCP Option 242 for TMS, and DHCP Option
150 for CUCM). An address set in the Provisioning ExternalManager Address setting will
override the address provided by DHCP.
Default value: HTTP
Value space: HTTPS/HTTP
HTTPS: Send requests via HTTPS.
HTTP: Send requests via HTTP.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
180
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Provisioning ExternalManager Path
Provisioning Mode
Define the Path to the external manager / provisioning system. This setting is required
when several management services reside on the same server, i.e. share the same External
Manager address.
It is possible to configure a video system using a provisioning system (external manager).
This allows video conferencing network administrators to manage many video systems
simultaneously. With this setting you choose which type of provisioning system to
use. Provisioning can also be switched off. Contact your provisioning system provider/
representative for more information.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: Auto
A valid path to the external manager or provisioning system.
Value space: Off/Auto/CUCM/Edge/Webex/TMS/VCS
Off: The video system is not configured by a provisioning system.
Provisioning ExternalManager Domain
Auto: The provisioning server is automatically selected as set up in the DHCP server.
Define the SIP domain for the VCS provisioning server.
CUCM: Push configurations to the video system from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager).
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: String (0, 64)
Edge: Push configurations to the video system from CUCM (Cisco Unified
Communications Manager). The system connects to CUCM via the Expressway
infrastructure. In order to register over Expressway the encryption option key must be
installed on the video system.
A valid domain name.
Webex: Push configurations to the video system from the Cisco Webex cloud service.
Default value: ""
TMS: Push configurations to the video system from TMS (Cisco TelePresence
Management System).
VCS: Push configurations to the video system from VCS (Cisco TelePresence Video
Communication Server).
Provisioning LoginName
This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate the video system with the
provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 80)
A valid username.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
181
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Provisioning Password
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate the video system with the
provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 64)
A valid password.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
182
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Proximity settings
Proximity Mode
Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients
Determine whether the video system will emit ultrasound pairing messages or not.
Enable or disable content sharing from Proximity clients. When this setting is enabled, you
can share content from a Proximity client wirelessly on the video system, e.g. share your
laptop screen. This service is supported by laptops (OS X and Windows). Proximity Mode
must be On for this setting to take any effect.
When the video system emits ultrasound, Proximity clients can detect that they are close
to the video system. In order to use a client, at least one of the Proximity services must be
enabled (refer to the Proximity Services settings). In general, Cisco recommends enabling
all the Proximity services.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Enabled
Default value: On
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Value space: Off/On
Enabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is enabled.
Off: The video system does not emit ultrasound, and Proximity services cannot be used.
Disabled: Content sharing from a Proximity client is disabled.
On: The video system emits ultrasound, and Proximity clients can detect that they are
close to the video system. Enabled Proximity services can be used.
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients
Enable or disable content sharing to Proximity clients. When enabled, Proximity clients will
receive the presentation from the video system. You can zoom in on details, view previous
content and take snapshots. This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
Proximity Services CallControl
Enable or disable basic call control features on Proximity clients. When this setting is
enabled, you are able to control a call using a Proximity client (for example dial, mute,
adjust volume and hang up). This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Disabled
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Default value: Disabled
Enabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is enabled.
Value space: Enabled/Disabled
Disabled: Content sharing to a Proximity client is disabled.
Enabled: Call control from a Proximity client is enabled.
Disabled: Call control from a Proximity client is disabled.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
183
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
RoomAnalytics settings
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector
The video system has the capability to find whether or not people are present in the room,
and report the result in the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence status. This feature is based on
ultrasound. It takes a minimum of 2 minutes to detect whether people are present or not in
the room, and it may take up to 2 minutes for the status to change after the room becomes
vacant.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The video system's status does not show whether or not there are people present in
the room.
On: The video system's status shows whether or not there are people present in the
room.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
184
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
RoomReset settings
RoomReset Control
This setting is for use with control systems or macros. Macros allow you to write snippets
of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video endpoint, thus creating custom
behavior.
When a room has been idle for some time the system can send an event to indicate that the
room is ready to be reset.
The events that are sent when this setting is enabled are:
*e RoomReset SecondsToReset: 30
** end
*e RoomReset Reset
** end
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: CameraPositionsOnly/Off/On
CameraPositionsOnly: Not applicable.
Off: No RoomReset events will be sent.
On: The room reset control is enabled and RoomReset events will be sent.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
185
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
RTP settings
RTP Ports Range Start
RTP Video Ports Range Start
Define the first port in the range of RTP ports.
Define the first port in the range of RTP video ports.
As default, the system is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2486 for RTP and RTCP
media data. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled, and 20
when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled.
If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To
enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between
1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 2326
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (1024..65438)
Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65454)
Set the first port in the range of RTP ports.
Set the first port in the range of RTP video ports.
RTP Ports Range Stop
RTP Video Ports Range Stop
Define the last port in the range of RTP ports.
Define the last port in the range of RTP video ports.
As default, the system is using the ports in the range 2326 to 2487 for RTP and RTCP
media data. If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled the system is using the ports in the
range 1024 to 65436. The minimum range is 100 when RTP Video Ports Range is disabled,
and 20 when RTP Video Ports Range is enabled.
If both the start and stop values are set to 0, the RTP Video Ports Range is disabled. To
enable it, set the first port to a value between 1024 and 65454 and the last port between
1024 and 65535. The minimum range is 80.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
If the RTP Video Ports Range is enabled, audio will use the range defined by the RTP Ports
Range settings, and other media data will use the range defined by the RTP Video Ports
Range settings. The two ranges must not overlap.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
A change in the setting will take effect on new calls.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 0
Default value: 2486
Value space: Integer (0, 1024..65535)
Value space: Integer (1120..65535)
Set the last port in the range of RTP video ports.
Set the last port in the range of RTP ports.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
186
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Security settings
Security Audit Logging Mode
Security Audit OnError Action
Define where to record or transmit the audit logs. The audit logs are sent to a syslog server.
This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.
Define what happens when the connection to the syslog server is lost. This setting is only
relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to ExternalSecure.
When using the External or ExternalSecure mode you must enter the address of the audit
server in the Security Audit Server Address setting.
Requires user role: AUDIT
Default value: Ignore
Requires user role: AUDIT
Value space: Halt/Ignore
Default value: Internal
Halt: If a halt condition is detected the system codec is rebooted and only the auditor is
allowed to operate the unit until the halt condition has passed. When the halt condition
has passed the audit logs are re-spooled to the syslog server. Halt conditions are: A
network breach (no physical link), no syslog server running (or incorrect address or port
to the syslog server), TLS authentication failed (if in use), local backup (re-spooling) log
full.
Value space: External/ExternalSecure/Internal/Off
External: The system sends the audit logs to an external syslog server. The syslog server
must support UDP.
ExternalSecure: The video system sends encrypted audit logs to an external syslog
server that is verified by a certificate in the Audit CA list. The Audit CA list file must be
uploaded to the video system using the web interface. The common_name parameter
of a certificate in the CA list must match the IP address or DNS name of the syslog
server, and the secure TCP server must be set up to listen for secure (TLS) TCP Syslog
messages.
Ignore: The system will continue its normal operation, and rotate internal logs when full.
When the connection is restored it will again send its audit logs to the syslog server.
Security Audit Server Address
Internal: The system records the audit logs to internal logs, and rotates logs when they
are full.
Set the IP address or DNS name of the syslog server that the audit logs are sent to.
This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to External or
ExternalSecure.
Off: No audit logging is performed.
Requires user role: AUDIT
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or DNS name.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
187
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Security Audit Server Port
Security Session InactivityTimeout
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the port of the syslog server that the
system shall send its audit logs to. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Server
PortAssignment is set to Manual.
Define how long the system will accept inactivity from the user before he is automatically
logged out from a web, Telnet, or SSH session.
Requires user role: AUDIT
Requires user role: ADMIN
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Default value: 514
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
Value space: Integer (0..10000)
Set the audit server port.
Set the inactivity timeout (minutes); or select 0 when inactivity should not enforce
automatic logout.
Security Audit Server PortAssignment
Security Session MaxFailedLogins
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. You can define how the port number of the
external syslog server will be assigned. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit
Logging Mode is set to External or ExternalSecure. To see which port number is used you
can check the Security Audit Server Port status. Navigate to Setup > Status on the web
interface or; if on a command line interface, run the command xStatus Security Audit Server
Port.
Define the maximum number of failed login attempts per user for a web or SSH session. If
the user exceeded the maximum number of attempts the user will be locked out. 0 means
that there is no limit for failed logins.
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: AUDIT
Default value: Auto
Default value: 0
Value space: Auto/Manual
Value space: Integer (0..10)
Set the maximum number of failed login attempts per user.
Auto: Will use UDP port number 514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
External. Will use TCP port number 6514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
ExternalSecure.
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
Manual: Will use the port value defined in the Security Audit Server Port setting.
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user is 20 sessions.
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 20
Define how long the system will lock out a user after failed login to a web or SSH session.
Restart the system for any change to this setting to take effect.
Value space: Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 60
Value space: Integer (0..10000)
Set the lockout time (minutes).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
188
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Security Session MaxTotalSessions
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total is 20 sessions.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 20
Value space: Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total.
Security Session ShowLastLogon
When logging in to the system using SSH or Telnet you will see the UserId, time and date of
the last session that did a successful login.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
On: Show information about the last session.
Off: Do not show information about the last session.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
189
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
SerialPort settings
SerialPort Mode
Enable/disable the serial port.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: Disable the serial port.
On: Enable the serial port.
SerialPort BaudRate
Set the baud rate (data transmission rate, bits per second) for the serial port.
Other connection parameters for the serial port are: Data bits: 8; Parity: None; Stop bits: 1;
Flow control: None.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 115200
Value space: 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
Choose a baud rate from the baud rates listed (bps).
SerialPort LoginRequired
Define if login shall be required when connecting to the serial port.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: On
Value space: Off/On
Off: The user can access the codec via the serial port without any login.
On: Login is required when connecting to the codec via the serial port.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
190
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
SIP settings
SIP ANAT
SIP DefaultTransport
ANAT (Alternative Network Address Types) enables media negotiation for multiple
addresses and address types, as specified in RFC 4091.
Select the transport protocol to be used over the LAN.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Auto/TCP/Tls/UDP
Value space: Off/On
TCP: The system will always use TCP as the default transport method.
Off: Disable ANAT.
UDP: The system will always use UDP as the default transport method.
On: Enable ANAT.
Tls: The system will always use TLS as the default transport method. For TLS
connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the video system. If no such CA-list is
available on the system then anonymous Diffie Hellman will be used.
SIP Authentication UserName
Auto: The system will try to connect using transport protocols in the following order: TLS,
TCP, UDP.
This is the user name part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.
Requires user role: ADMIN
SIP DisplayName
Default value: ""
When configured the incoming call will report the display name instead of the SIP URI.
Value space: String (0, 128)
A valid username.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
SIP Authentication Password
Value space: String (0, 550)
The name to be displayed instead of the SIP URI.
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 128)
A valid password.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
191
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
SIP Ice DefaultCandidate
SIP Line
The ICE protocol needs some time to reach a conclusion about which media route to use
(up to the first 5 seconds of a call). During this period media for the video system will be
sent to the Default Candidate as defined in this setting.
When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) the endpoint may be
part of a shared line. This means that several devices share the same directory number. The
different devices sharing the same number receive status from the other appearances on
the line as defined in RFC 4235.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Host
Note that shared lines are set up by CUCM, not by the endpoint. Therefore do not change
this setting manually; CUCM pushes this information to the endpoint when required.
Value space: Host/Rflx/Relay
Requires user role: ADMIN
Host: Send media to the video system's private IP address.
Default value: Private
Rflx: Send media to the video system's public IP address, as seen by the TURN server.
Value space: Private/Shared
Relay: Send media to the IP address and port allocated on the TURN server.
Shared: The system is part of a shared line and is therefore sharing its directory number
with other devices.
SIP Ice Mode
Private: This system is not part of a shared line.
ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment, RFC 5245) is a NAT traversal solution that the
video systems can use to discover the optimized media path. Thus the shortest route for
audio and video is always secured between the video systems.
SIP ListenPort
Turn on or off the listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports. If turned
off, the endpoint will only be reachable through the SIP registrar (CUCM or VCS). As a
security measure, SIP ListenPort should be Off when the endpoint is registered to a SIP
Proxy.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Off/On
Requires user role: ADMIN
Auto: ICE is enabled if a TURN server is provided, otherwise ICE is disabled.
Default value: On
Off: ICE is disabled.
On: ICE is enabled.
Value space: Off/On
Off: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned off.
On: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned on.
SIP Mailbox
When registered to a Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM) you may be offered
the option of having a private voice mailbox.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 255)
A valid number or address. Leave the string empty if you do not have a voice mailbox.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
192
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
SIP MinimumTLSVersion
SIP TlsVerify
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
For TLS connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the video system. This can be done
from the web interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: TLSv1.0
Default value: Off
Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Value space: Off/On
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
Off: Set to Off to allow TLS connections without verifying them. The TLS connections
are allowed to be set up without verifying the x.509 certificate received from the server
against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no SIP CA-list has been
uploaded.
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
On: Set to On to verify TLS connections. Only TLS connections to servers, whose x.509
certificate is validated against the CA-list, will be allowed.
SIP PreferredIPSignaling
Define the preferred IP version for signaling (audio, video, data). Only applicable when both
Network IPStack and Conference CallProtocolIPStack are set to Dual, and the network does
not have a mechanism for choosing the preferred IP version. It also determines the priority
of the A/AAAA lookups in DNS, so that the preferred IP version is used for registration.
SIP Turn DiscoverMode
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the discover mode to enable/disable the application to search for available Turn
servers in DNS. Before making calls, the system will test if port allocation is possible.
Default value: IPv4
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: IPv4/IPv6
Default value: On
IPv4: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv4.
Value space: Off/On
IPv6: The preferred IP version for signaling is IPv6.
Off: Set to Off to disable discovery mode.
On: When set to On, the system will search for available Turn servers in DNS, and before
making calls the system will test if port allocation is possible.
SIP Proxy [n] Address
n: 1..4
SIP Turn DropRflx
The Proxy Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy. It is possible
to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP and
UDP but another one can be provided.
DropRflx will make the endpoint force media through the Turn relay, unless the remote
endpoint is on the same network.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Default value: Off
Value space: String (0..255)
Value space: Off/On
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Off: Disable DropRflx.
On: The system will force media through the Turn relay when the remote endpoint is on
another network.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
193
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
SIP Turn Server
SIP Type
Define the address of the TURN (Traversal Using Relay NAT) server. It is used as a media
relay fallback and it is also used to discover the endpoint's own public IP address.
Enables SIP extensions and special behavior for a vendor or provider.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Standard
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: Standard/Cisco
Value space: String (0..255)
Standard: Use this when registering to standard SIP Proxy (tested with Cisco
TelePresence VCS).
The preferred format is DNS SRV record (e.g. _turn._udp.<domain>), or it can be a valid
IPv4 or IPv6 address.
Cisco: Use this when registering to Cisco Unified Communication Manager.
SIP Turn UserName
SIP URI
Define the user name needed for accessing the TURN server.
The SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) is the address that is used to identify the video
system. The URI is registered and used by the SIP services to route inbound calls to the
system. The SIP URI syntax is defined in RFC 3261.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0, 128)
Default value: ""
A valid user name.
Value space: String (0..255)
An address (URI) that is compliant with the SIP URI syntax.
SIP Turn Password
Define the password needed for accessing the TURN server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 128)
A valid password.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
194
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Standby settings
Standby BootAction
Standby StandbyAction
Define the camera position after a restart of the codec.
Define the camera position when going into standby mode.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: DefaultCameraPosition
Default value: PrivacyPosition
Value space: None/DefaultCameraPosition/RestoreCameraPosition
Value space: None/PrivacyPosition
None: No action.
None: No action.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video system restarts, the camera returns to the
position that it had before the restart.
PrivacyPosition: When the video system enters standby, the camera turns to a sideways
position for privacy.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video system restarts, the camera moves to the
factory default position.
Standby WakeupAction
Standby Control
Define the camera position when leaving standby mode.
Define whether the system should go into standby mode or not.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: RestoreCameraPosition
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: None/RestoreCameraPosition/DefaultCameraPosition
Default value: On
None: No action.
Value space: Off/On
Off: The system will not enter standby mode.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video system leaves standby, the camera returns to
the position that it had before entering standby.
On: The system will enter standby mode when the Standby Delay has timed out.
Requires the Standby Delay to be set to an appropriate value.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video system leaves standby, the camera moves to
the factory default position.
Standby Delay
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
Define how long (in minutes) the system shall be in idle mode before it goes into standby
mode. Requires the Standby Control to be enabled.
Automatic wake up on motion detection is a feature that will sense when a person walks into
the room. The feature is based on ultrasound detection.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 10
Default value: On
Value space: Integer (1..480)
Value space: Off/On
Set the standby delay (minutes).
Off: The wake up on motion detection is disabled.
On: When people walk into the room the system will automatically wake up from standby.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
195
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Standby PowerSave
You can reduce the video system's power consumption during out-of-office hours with this
setting. The Power Save mode is an extension to the regular standby mode.
When the video system enters power save mode, power is cut to some of the video
system's modules, for example the integrated cameras. The codec and Touch controller
behaves like in regular standby. The video system wakes up from power save mode when
you tap the touch panel.
Waking up the video system from power save mode takes longer than waking it up from
regular standby, because the cameras must boot. You can make calls right away, but there
is no outgoing video until the cameras has completed their boot process.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Never
Value space: Never/OutsideOfficeHours
Never: The video system will never go into power save mode; only to regular standby.
OutsideOfficeHours: The video system will go into power save mode during out-of-office
hours. You must provide the office hours with the following settings: Time WorkWeek
FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time
WorkDay End.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
196
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
SystemUnit settings
SystemUnit Name
SystemUnit CrashReporting Url
Define the system name. The system name will be sent as the hostname in a DHCP request
and when the codec is acting as an SNMP Agent.
If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 50)
Value space: String (0..255)
Define the system name.
The URL to the Cisco Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR).
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced
If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: The ACR tool will perform standard log analyses.
On: The ACR tool will perform advanced log analyses.
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode
If the video system (codec) crashes, the system can automatically send logs to the Cisco
Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage
only and not available to customers.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: No logs will be sent to ACR tool.
On: The logs will automatically be sent to ACR tool.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
197
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Time settings
Time TimeFormat
Define the time format.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 24H
Value space: 24H/12H
24H: Set the time format to 24 hours.
12H: Set the time format to 12 hours (AM/PM).
Time DateFormat
Define the date format.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: DD_MM_YY
Value space: DD_MM_YY/MM_DD_YY/YY_MM_DD
DD_MM_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 30.01.10
MM_DD_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 01.30.10
YY_MM_DD: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 10.01.30
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
198
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Time Zone
Appendices
Miquelon, America/Moncton, America/Monterrey, America/Montevideo, America/Montreal,
America/Montserrat, America/Nassau, America/New_York, America/Nipigon, America/
Nome, America/Noronha, America/North_Dakota/Beulah, America/North_Dakota/Center,
America/North_Dakota/New_Salem, America/Ojinaga, America/Panama, America/
Pangnirtung, America/Paramaribo, America/Phoenix, America/Port-au-Prince, America/
Port_of_Spain, America/Porto_Acre, America/Porto_Velho, America/Puerto_Rico, America/
Rainy_River, America/Rankin_Inlet, America/Recife, America/Regina, America/Resolute,
America/Rio_Branco, America/Rosario, America/Santa_Isabel, America/Santarem,
America/Santiago, America/Santo_Domingo, America/Sao_Paulo, America/Scoresbysund,
America/Shiprock, America/Sitka, America/St_Barthelemy, America/St_Johns, America/
St_Kitts, America/St_Lucia, America/St_Thomas, America/St_Vincent, America/Swift_
Current, America/Tegucigalpa, America/Thule, America/Thunder_Bay, America/Tijuana,
America/Toronto, America/Tortola, America/Vancouver, America/Virgin, America/
Whitehorse, America/Winnipeg, America/Yakutat, America/Yellowknife, Antarctica/Casey,
Antarctica/Davis, Antarctica/DumontDUrville, Antarctica/Macquarie, Antarctica/Mawson,
Antarctica/McMurdo, Antarctica/Palmer, Antarctica/Rothera, Antarctica/South_Pole,
Antarctica/Syowa, Antarctica/Troll, Antarctica/Vostok, Arctic/Longyearbyen, Asia/Aden,
Asia/Almaty, Asia/Amman, Asia/Anadyr, Asia/Aqtau, Asia/Aqtobe, Asia/Ashgabat, Asia/
Ashkhabad, Asia/Baghdad, Asia/Bahrain, Asia/Baku, Asia/Bangkok, Asia/Barnaul, Asia/
Beirut, Asia/Bishkek, Asia/Brunei, Asia/Calcutta, Asia/Chita, Asia/Choibalsan, Asia/
Chongqing, Asia/Chungking, Asia/Colombo, Asia/Dacca, Asia/Damascus, Asia/Dhaka, Asia/
Dili, Asia/Dubai, Asia/Dushanbe, Asia/Gaza, Asia/Harbin, Asia/Hebron, Asia/Ho_Chi_Minh,
Asia/Hong_Kong, Asia/Hovd, Asia/Irkutsk, Asia/Istanbul, Asia/Jakarta, Asia/Jayapura, Asia/
Jerusalem, Asia/Kabul, Asia/Kamchatka, Asia/Karachi, Asia/Kashgar, Asia/Kathmandu, Asia/
Katmandu, Asia/Khandyga, Asia/Kolkata, Asia/Krasnoyarsk, Asia/Kuala_Lumpur, Asia/
Kuching, Asia/Kuwait, Asia/Macao, Asia/Macau, Asia/Magadan, Asia/Makassar, Asia/Manila,
Asia/Muscat, Asia/Nicosia, Asia/Novokuznetsk, Asia/Novosibirsk, Asia/Omsk, Asia/Oral,
Asia/Phnom_Penh, Asia/Pontianak, Asia/Pyongyang, Asia/Qatar, Asia/Qyzylorda, Asia/
Rangoon, Asia/Riyadh, Asia/Saigon, Asia/Sakhalin, Asia/Samarkand, Asia/Seoul, Asia/
Shanghai, Asia/Singapore, Asia/Srednekolymsk, Asia/Taipei, Asia/Tashkent, Asia/Tbilisi,
Asia/Tehran, Asia/Tel_Aviv, Asia/Thimbu, Asia/Thimphu, Asia/Tokyo, Asia/Tomsk, Asia/
Ujung_Pandang, Asia/Ulaanbaatar, Asia/Ulan_Bator, Asia/Urumqi, Asia/Ust-Nera, Asia/
Vientiane, Asia/Vladivostok, Asia/Yakutsk, Asia/Yekaterinburg, Asia/Yerevan, Atlantic/
Azores, Atlantic/Bermuda, Atlantic/Canary, Atlantic/Cape_Verde, Atlantic/Faeroe, Atlantic/
Faroe, Atlantic/Jan_Mayen, Atlantic/Madeira, Atlantic/Reykjavik, Atlantic/South_Georgia,
Atlantic/St_Helena, Atlantic/Stanley, Australia/ACT, Australia/Adelaide, Australia/Brisbane,
Australia/Broken_Hill, Australia/Canberra, Australia/Currie, Australia/Darwin, Australia/Eucla,
Australia/Hobart, Australia/LHI, Australia/Lindeman, Australia/Lord_Howe, Australia/
Melbourne, Australia/NSW, Australia/North, Australia/Perth, Australia/Queensland, Australia/
South, Australia/Sydney, Australia/Tasmania, Australia/Victoria, Australia/West, Australia/
Yancowinna, Brazil/Acre, Brazil/DeNoronha, Brazil/East, Brazil/West, CET, CST6CDT,
Canada/Atlantic, Canada/Central, Canada/East-Saskatchewan, Canada/Eastern, Canada/
Mountain, Canada/Newfoundland, Canada/Pacific, Canada/Saskatchewan, Canada/Yukon,
Chile/Continental, Chile/EasterIsland, Cuba, EET, EST, EST5EDT, Egypt, Eire, Etc/GMT, Etc/
GMT+0, Etc/GMT+1, Etc/GMT+10, Etc/GMT+11, Etc/GMT+12, Etc/GMT+2, Etc/GMT+3, Etc/
Define the time zone for the geographical location of the video system. The information in
the value space is from the tz database, also called the IANA Time Zone Database.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Etc/UTC
Value space: Africa/Abidjan, Africa/Accra, Africa/Addis_Ababa, Africa/Algiers, Africa/
Asmara, Africa/Asmera, Africa/Bamako, Africa/Bangui, Africa/Banjul, Africa/Bissau, Africa/
Blantyre, Africa/Brazzaville, Africa/Bujumbura, Africa/Cairo, Africa/Casablanca, Africa/Ceuta,
Africa/Conakry, Africa/Dakar, Africa/Dar_es_Salaam, Africa/Djibouti, Africa/Douala, Africa/
El_Aaiun, Africa/Freetown, Africa/Gaborone, Africa/Harare, Africa/Johannesburg, Africa/
Juba, Africa/Kampala, Africa/Khartoum, Africa/Kigali, Africa/Kinshasa, Africa/Lagos, Africa/
Libreville, Africa/Lome, Africa/Luanda, Africa/Lubumbashi, Africa/Lusaka, Africa/Malabo,
Africa/Maputo, Africa/Maseru, Africa/Mbabane, Africa/Mogadishu, Africa/Monrovia, Africa/
Nairobi, Africa/Ndjamena, Africa/Niamey, Africa/Nouakchott, Africa/Ouagadougou, Africa/
Porto-Novo, Africa/Sao_Tome, Africa/Timbuktu, Africa/Tripoli, Africa/Tunis, Africa/
Windhoek, America/Adak, America/Anchorage, America/Anguilla, America/Antigua,
America/Araguaina, America/Argentina/Buenos_Aires, America/Argentina/Catamarca,
America/Argentina/ComodRivadavia, America/Argentina/Cordoba, America/Argentina/Jujuy,
America/Argentina/La_Rioja, America/Argentina/Mendoza, America/Argentina/Rio_
Gallegos, America/Argentina/Salta, America/Argentina/San_Juan, America/Argentina/
San_Luis, America/Argentina/Tucuman, America/Argentina/Ushuaia, America/Aruba,
America/Asuncion, America/Atikokan, America/Atka, America/Bahia, America/Bahia_
Banderas, America/Barbados, America/Belem, America/Belize, America/Blanc-Sablon,
America/Boa_Vista, America/Bogota, America/Boise, America/Buenos_Aires, America/
Cambridge_Bay, America/Campo_Grande, America/Cancun, America/Caracas, America/
Catamarca, America/Cayenne, America/Cayman, America/Chicago, America/Chihuahua,
America/Coral_Harbour, America/Cordoba, America/Costa_Rica, America/Creston,
America/Cuiaba, America/Curacao, America/Danmarkshavn, America/Dawson, America/
Dawson_Creek, America/Denver, America/Detroit, America/Dominica, America/Edmonton,
America/Eirunepe, America/El_Salvador, America/Ensenada, America/Fort_Nelson,
America/Fort_Wayne, America/Fortaleza, America/Glace_Bay, America/Godthab, America/
Goose_Bay, America/Grand_Turk, America/Grenada, America/Guadeloupe, America/
Guatemala, America/Guayaquil, America/Guyana, America/Halifax, America/Havana,
America/Hermosillo, America/Indiana/Indianapolis, America/Indiana/Knox, America/Indiana/
Marengo, America/Indiana/Petersburg, America/Indiana/Tell_City, America/Indiana/Vevay,
America/Indiana/Vincennes, America/Indiana/Winamac, America/Indianapolis, America/
Inuvik, America/Iqaluit, America/Jamaica, America/Jujuy, America/Juneau, America/
Kentucky/Louisville, America/Kentucky/Monticello, America/Knox_IN, America/Kralendijk,
America/La_Paz, America/Lima, America/Los_Angeles, America/Louisville, America/
Lower_Princes, America/Maceio, America/Managua, America/Manaus, America/Marigot,
America/Martinique, America/Matamoros, America/Mazatlan, America/Mendoza, America/
Menominee, America/Merida, America/Metlakatla, America/Mexico_City, America/
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
System
System settings
settings
199
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Time WorkDay Start
GMT+4, Etc/GMT+5, Etc/GMT+6, Etc/GMT+7, Etc/GMT+8, Etc/GMT+9, Etc/GMT-0, Etc/GMT-1,
Etc/GMT-10, Etc/GMT-11, Etc/GMT-12, Etc/GMT-13, Etc/GMT-14, Etc/GMT-2, Etc/GMT-3,
Etc/GMT-4, Etc/GMT-5, Etc/GMT-6, Etc/GMT-7, Etc/GMT-8, Etc/GMT-9, Etc/GMT0, Etc/
Greenwich, Etc/UCT, Etc/UTC, Etc/Universal, Etc/Zulu, Europe/Amsterdam, Europe/Andorra,
Europe/Astrakhan, Europe/Athens, Europe/Belfast, Europe/Belgrade, Europe/Berlin, Europe/
Bratislava, Europe/Brussels, Europe/Bucharest, Europe/Budapest, Europe/Busingen,
Europe/Chisinau, Europe/Copenhagen, Europe/Dublin, Europe/Gibraltar, Europe/Guernsey,
Europe/Helsinki, Europe/Isle_of_Man, Europe/Istanbul, Europe/Jersey, Europe/Kaliningrad,
Europe/Kiev, Europe/Kirov, Europe/Lisbon, Europe/Ljubljana, Europe/London, Europe/
Luxembourg, Europe/Madrid, Europe/Malta, Europe/Mariehamn, Europe/Minsk, Europe/
Monaco, Europe/Moscow, Europe/Nicosia, Europe/Oslo, Europe/Paris, Europe/Podgorica,
Europe/Prague, Europe/Riga, Europe/Rome, Europe/Samara, Europe/San_Marino, Europe/
Sarajevo, Europe/Simferopol, Europe/Skopje, Europe/Sofia, Europe/Stockholm, Europe/
Tallinn, Europe/Tirane, Europe/Tiraspol, Europe/Ulyanovsk, Europe/Uzhgorod, Europe/
Vaduz, Europe/Vatican, Europe/Vienna, Europe/Vilnius, Europe/Volgograd, Europe/Warsaw,
Europe/Zagreb, Europe/Zaporozhye, Europe/Zurich, GB, GB-Eire, GMT, GMT+0, GMT-0,
GMT0, Greenwich, HST, Hongkong, Iceland, Indian/Antananarivo, Indian/Chagos, Indian/
Christmas, Indian/Cocos, Indian/Comoro, Indian/Kerguelen, Indian/Mahe, Indian/Maldives,
Indian/Mauritius, Indian/Mayotte, Indian/Reunion, Iran, Israel, Jamaica, Japan, Kwajalein,
Libya, MET, MST, MST7MDT, Mexico/BajaNorte, Mexico/BajaSur, Mexico/General, NZ,
NZ-CHAT, Navajo, PRC, PST8PDT, Pacific/Apia, Pacific/Auckland, Pacific/Bougainville,
Pacific/Chatham, Pacific/Chuuk, Pacific/Easter, Pacific/Efate, Pacific/Enderbury, Pacific/
Fakaofo, Pacific/Fiji, Pacific/Funafuti, Pacific/Galapagos, Pacific/Gambier, Pacific/
Guadalcanal, Pacific/Guam, Pacific/Honolulu, Pacific/Johnston, Pacific/Kiritimati, Pacific/
Kosrae, Pacific/Kwajalein, Pacific/Majuro, Pacific/Marquesas, Pacific/Midway, Pacific/Nauru,
Pacific/Niue, Pacific/Norfolk, Pacific/Noumea, Pacific/Pago_Pago, Pacific/Palau, Pacific/
Pitcairn, Pacific/Pohnpei, Pacific/Ponape, Pacific/Port_Moresby, Pacific/Rarotonga, Pacific/
Saipan, Pacific/Samoa, Pacific/Tahiti, Pacific/Tarawa, Pacific/Tongatapu, Pacific/Truk,
Pacific/Wake, Pacific/Wallis, Pacific/Yap, Poland, Portugal, ROC, ROK, Singapore, Turkey,
UCT, US/Alaska, US/Aleutian, US/Arizona, US/Central, US/East-Indiana, US/Eastern, US/
Hawaii, US/Indiana-Starke, US/Michigan, US/Mountain, US/Pacific, US/Pacific-New, US/
Samoa, UTC, Universal, W-SU, WET, Zulu
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "07:00"
Value space: String (5, 5)
The working day start time, using the 24-hour clock.
Time WorkDay End
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: "18:00"
Value space: String (5, 5)
The working day end time, using the 24-hour clock.
Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek
Select a time zone from the list.
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Monday
Value space: Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday
The first day of the working week.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
200
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay
Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the
regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which
is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: Friday
Value space: Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday
The last day of the working week.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
201
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
UserInterface settings
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification
UserInterface ContactInfo Type
You can enable an incoming call notification with amplified visuals. The screen and Touch
10 will flash red/white approximately once every second (1.75 Hz) to make it easier for
hearing impaired users to notice an incoming call. If the system is already in a call the
screen will not flash as this will disturb the on-going call, instead you will get a normal
notification on screen and touch panel.
Choose which type of contact information to show in the user interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/DisplayName/E164Alias/H320Number/H323Id/IPv4/IPv6/None/SipUri/
SystemName
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Default
Auto: Show the address which another system should dial to reach this video system.
The address depends on the default call protocol and system registration.
Value space: AmplifiedVisuals/Default
None: Do not show any contact information.
AmplifiedVisuals: Enable the amplified visuals on screen and touch panel when the video
system receives a call.
IPv4: Show the system's IPv4 address.
IPv6: Show the system's IPv6 address.
Default: Enable the default behavior with a notification on screen and touch panel.
H323Id: Show the system's H.323 ID (refer to the H323 H323Alias ID setting).
H320Number: Show the system's H.320 number as contact information (only supported
if used with Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link).
UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors
If the video system is set up with branding customizations, this setting affects the colors of
the logo that is shown when the video system is awake. You can choose whether you want
to show the logo in full color, or reduce the opacity of the logo so that it blends in more
naturally with the background and other elements on the screen.
E164Alias: Show the system's H.323 E164 Alias as contact information (refer to the H323
H323Alias E164 setting).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
DisplayName: Show the system's display name (refer to the SIP DisplayName setting).
SipUri: Show the system's SIP URI (refer to the SIP URI setting).
SystemName: Show the system's name (refer to the SystemUnit Name setting).
Default value: Auto
UserInterface CustomMessage
Value space: Auto/Native
Auto: The opacity of the logo is reduced.
A custom message can be displayed, in the lower left side of the screen, in awake mode.
Native: The logo has full colors.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 128)
Add a custom message. Add an empty string to remove a custom message.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
202
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
UserInterface KeyTones Mode
UserInterface Features Call Start
You can configure the system to make a keyboard click sound effect (key tone) when typing
text or numbers.
Choose whether or not to remove the default Call button (including the directory, favorites,
and recent calls lists) and the default in-call Add participant button from the user interface.
The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Default value: Auto
Value space: Off/On
Value space: Auto/Hidden
Off: There is no key tone sound effect.
Auto: Shows the default buttons in the user interface.
On: The key tone sound effect is turned on.
Hidden: Removes the default buttons from the user interface.
UserInterface Features Call End
UserInterface Features Call VideoMute
Choose whether or not to remove the default End Call button from the user interface. The
setting removes only the button, not its functionality as such.
Choose whether or not to show the default "Turn video off" button in the user interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Hidden
Value space: Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.
Auto: Shows the "Turn video off" button in the user interface if this feature is supported
in the ongoing call.
Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.
Hidden: The "Turn video off" button is never shown in the user interface.
UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls
UserInterface Features HideAll
Choose whether or not to remove the default Hold, Transfer, and Resume in-call buttons
from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as
such.
Choose whether or not to remove all default buttons from the user interface. The setting
removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Default value: False
Value space: Auto/Hidden
Value space: False/True
Auto: Shows the default buttons in the user interface.
False: Shows all default buttons in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default buttons from the user interface.
True: Removes all default buttons from the user interface.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
203
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
UserInterface Features Share Start
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator
Choose whether or not to remove the default buttons and other UI elements for sharing and
previewing content, both in call and out of call, from the user interface. The setting removes
only the buttons and UI elements, not their functionality as such. You can share content
using Proximity or the Cisco Webex Teams app still.
Define for how long the encryption indicator is shown on screen. The icon for encrypted
calls is a locked padlock.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Auto/AlwaysOn/AlwaysOff
Default value: Auto
Auto: If the call is encrypted, a "Call is encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
Value space: Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default buttons and UI elements in the user interface.
If the call is not encrypted, a "Call is not encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
No encryption indicator icon is shown.
Hidden: Removes the default buttons and UI elements from the user interface.
AlwaysOn: The “Call is encrypted” notification is shown for 5 seconds. Then, an
encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
UserInterface Language
AlwaysOff: The encryption indicator is never displayed on screen.
Select the language to be used in the user interface. If the language is not supported, the
default language (English) will be used.
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
A custom message can be displayed in the middle of the main screen when the system is
in the half wake state. The custom message will replace the default message, which gives
instructions how to start using the video system. You can also delete the default message,
without adding a custom message.
Default value: English
Value space: Arabic/Catalan/ChineseSimplified/ChineseTraditional/Czech/Danish/Dutch/
English/EnglishUK/Finnish/French/FrenchCanadian/German/Hebrew/Hungarian/Italian/
Japanese/Korean/Norwegian/Polish/Portuguese/PortugueseBrazilian/Russian/Spanish/
SpanishLatin/Swedish/Turkish
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Select a language from the list.
Value space: String (0, 128)
The custom message. An empty string: Restore the default message. A space only:
There will be no message at all.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
204
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
UserInterface OSD Output
UserInterface Security Mode
Define on which monitor the on-screen information and indicators (OSD) should be
displayed.
This setting allows you to prevent important system information from being exposed in the
user interface (drop down menu and Settings panel), for example the contact information
and IP addresses of the video system, touch controller, and UCM/VCS registrars. It is
important to note that such information is not hidden when navigating further into the
Settings panel.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 1
If you want to fully prevent that people without administrator rights can see the contact
information, IP addresses, MAC address, serial number, and software version, you must
also set the UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode to Locked, and of course have a passphrase
for all user accounts with administrator rights.
Value space: Auto/1/2/3
Auto: The system sends the on-screen information and indicators to the system's
integrated screen. If the system has two integrated screens, the left monitor is used.
1-3: The system sends the on-screen information and indicators to the specified output.
Choose n to send the on-screen information and indicators to the system's Output
Connector n.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Normal
Value space: Normal/Strong
UserInterface Phonebook Mode
Normal: IP addresses and other system information are shown on the user interface.
Strong: Contact information and IP addresses are not displayed on the user interface
(drop down menu and Settings panel).
This setting determines if a user is allowed to add or change a contact in the Directory and
Favorites list from the user interface of the video system.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
Default value: ReadWrite
The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch 10 or on-screen) can be protected by the
video system's admin password. If this password is blank, anyone can access the settings
in the Settings panel, and for example factory reset the system. If authentication is enabled,
all settings that require authentication have a padlock icon. You will be prompted to enter
the administrator's user name and passphrase when you select the setting. Some settings
do not require authentication, they do not have a padlock icon.
Value space: ReadOnly/ReadWrite
ReadOnly: You neither can add a contact to the Favorites list, edit a contact in the
Favorites list, nor edit any contact from the Directory or Favorites list before calling.
ReadWrite: You are able to add a contact to the Favorites list, edit a contact in the
Favorites list, and edit a contact from the Directory or Favorites list before calling.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Unlocked
Value space: Locked/Unlocked
Locked: Authentication with administrator's username and passphrase is required.
Unlocked: No authentication is required.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
205
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
Choose whether or not to show the system name (or contact information) in the upper left
corner of the user interface, and the associated drop down menu and Settings panel.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the system name with drop down menu and Settings panel in the upper left
corner of the user interface.
Hidden: Doesn't show the system name with drop down menu and Settings panel in the
upper left corner of the user interface.
UserInterface Sounds Mode
Not applicable in this version.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
UserInterface Wallpaper
Select a background image (wallpaper) for the video screen when idle.
You may upload a custom wallpaper to the video system using the web interface. The
following file formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG. The maximum file size is 4
MByte. When you use a custom wallpaper, the clock and the list of upcoming meetings are
removed from the main display
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Custom/None
Auto: Use the default wallpaper.
None: There is no background image on the screen.
Custom: Use the custom wallpaper as background image on the screen. If no custom
wallpaper is uploaded to the system, the setting will revert to the default value.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
206
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
UserManagement settings
UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter
UserManagement LDAP Attribute
The LDAP filter is used to determine which users should be granted administrator privileges.
The attribute used to map to the provided username. If not set, sAMAccountName is used.
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: ""
The attribute name.
Default value: ""
Value space: String (0, 1024)
UserManagement LDAP BaseDN
Refer to the LDAP specification for the syntax of this string. Example:
"(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com)
(sAMAccountName=username))"
The distinguishing name of the entry at which to start a search (base).
Requires user role: ADMIN
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group
Default value: ""
Members of this AD (Active Directory) group will be given administrator access. This setting
is a shorthand for saying (memberOf:1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941:=<group name>).
Value space: String (0..255)
The distinguishing name of the base. Example: "DC=company, DC=com"
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
UserManagement LDAP Encryption
Define how to secure the communication between the video system and the LDAP server.
You can override the port number by using the UserManagement LDAP Server Port setting.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0..255)
Default value: LDAPS
The distinguished name of the AD group. Example: "CN=admin group, OU=company
groups, DC=company, DC=com"
Value space: LDAPS/None/STARTTLS
LDAPS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 636 over TLS (Transport Layer Security).
None: Connect to LDAP server on port 389 with no encryption.
STARTTLS: Connect to LDAP server on port 389, then send STARTTLS to enable TLS
encryption.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
207
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion
UserManagement LDAP Server Address
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
Set the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: TLSv1.2
Default value: ""
Value space: TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
Value space: String (0..255)
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
Appendices
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or hostname.
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
UserManagement LDAP Server Port
Set the port to connect to the LDAP server on. If set to 0, use the default for the selected
protocol (see the UserManagement LDAP Encryption setting).
UserManagement LDAP Mode
The video system supports the use of an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
server as a central place to store and validate user names and passwords. Use this setting
to configure whether or not to use LDAP authentication. Our implementation is tested for
the Microsoft Active Directory (AD) service.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 0
Value space: Integer (0..65535)
If you switch on LDAP Mode, make sure to configure the other UserManagement LDAP
settings to suit your setup. Here is a few examples.
The LDAP server port number.
Example 1:
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"
When the video system connects to an LDAP server, the server will identify itself to the
video system by presenting its certificate. Use this setting to determine whether or not the
video system will verify the server certificate.
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Group: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups,
DC=company, DC=com"
Requires user role: ADMIN
Example 2:
Default value: On
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"
Value space: Off/On
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
Off: The video system will not verify the LDAP server’s certificate.
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter: "(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company
groups, DC=company, DC=com)(sAMAccountName=username))"
On: The video system must verify that the LDAP server’s certificate is signed by a
trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be on the list of trusted CAs that are
uploaded to the system in advance. Use the video system’s web interface to manage the
list of trusted CAs (see more details in the administrator guide).
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Off
Value space: Off/On
Off: LDAP authentication is not allowed.
On: LDAP authentication is allowed.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
208
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video settings
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local
Define the position on screen of the active speaker picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only
takes effect when using a video layout where the active speaker is a PiP, i.e. the Overlay
layout, or possibly a Custom layout (refer to the Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local setting).
The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call, it will have no
effect on the current call.
Select which video layout family to use locally.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: Auto
Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Current
Auto: The default layout family, as given in the layout database provided by the system,
will be used as the local layout.
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the local layout. All videos have equal size,
as long as there is space enough on the screen.
Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the local layout. The active
speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants
will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.
Current: The position of the active speaker PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a
call.
UpperLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the local layout. The active speaker,
or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants
will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
UpperCenter: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper center position.
UpperRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
CenterLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center left position.
Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.
The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
CentreRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the center right position.
LowerLeft: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The active speaker PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
209
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
Select which video layout family to be used in the stream that is sent to the remote
participants (far end). This setting applies only when using a video system's built-in MultiSite
feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference.
n: 1..5
The camera ID is a unique identifier of the camera that is connected to this video input. Use
the xStatus Camera API command to see the IDs of the different cameras.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Auto
Default value: Connector n: n Connector 5: 1
Value space: Auto/Equal/Prominent/Overlay/Single
Value space: Connector 1,2,3,4: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Connector 5: 1
Auto: The default layout family, as given by the local layout database, will be used as the
remote layout.
Select the ID of the camera.
Equal: The Equal layout family will be used as the remote layout. All videos have equal
size, as long as there is space enough on the screen.
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode
Prominent: The Prominent layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active
speaker, or the presentation if present, will be a large picture, while the other participants
will be small pictures. Transitions between active speakers are voice switched.
n: 1..5
Define whether the camera that is connected to this video input connector can be
controlled or not.
Overlay: The Overlay layout family will be used as the remote layout. The active speaker,
or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen, while the other participants
will be small pictures-in-picture (PiP). Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
Note that camera control is not available for Connector 5 (S-video/Composite).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Single: The active speaker, or the presentation if present, will be shown in full screen.
The other participants are not shown. Transitions between active speakers are voice
switched.
Default value: Connector 1,2,3: On Connector 4,5: Off
Value space: Connector 1,2,3,4: Off/On Connector 5: Off
Off: Disable camera control.
On: Enable camera control.
Video DefaultMainSource
Define which video input source to be used as the default main video source when you start
a call.
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Default value: 1
Value space: 1/2/3/4
The source that is used as the default main video source.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
210
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Video Input Connector [n] DviType
Video Input Connector [n] Name
n: 4..4
n: 1..5
The official DVI standard supports both digital and analog signals. In most cases the default
AutoDetect setting can detect whether the signal is analog RGB or digital. However, in some
rare cases when DVI-I cables are used (these cables can carry both the analog and digital
signals) the auto detection fails. This setting makes it possible to override the AutoDetect
and select the correct DVI video input.
Define a name for the video input connector.
Appendices
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1: "Camera 1" Connector 2: "" for single camera systems,
"Camera 2" for dual camera systems Connector 3: "PC (HDMI)" Connector 4: "PC
(VGA)" Connector 5: ""
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: String (0, 50)
Default value: AutoDetect
Name for the video input connector.
Value space: AutoDetect/Digital/AnalogRGB/AnalogYPbPr
AutoDetect: Set to AutoDetect to automatically detect if the signal is analog RGB or
digital.
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile
Digital: Set to Digital to force the DVI video input to Digital when using DVI-I cables with
both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
n: 1..5
AnalogRGB: Set to AnalogRGB to force the DVI video input to AnalogRGB when using
DVI-I cables with both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
This setting will not take effect if the corresponding Video Input Connector [n] Quality
setting is set to Sharpness.
AnalogYPbPr: Set to AnalogYPbPr to force the DVI video input to AnalogYPbPr, as the
component (YPbPr) signal cannot be auto detected.
The optimal definition profile reflects the lighting conditions in the video conferencing room
and the quality of the camera. The better lighting conditions and the better quality of the
camera, the higher the profile. Generally, the Normal or Medium profiles are recommended.
However, when the lighting conditions are very good, the High profile can be set in order to
increase the resolution for a given call rate. The resolution must be supported by both the
calling and called systems.
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType
n: 1..5
Use the Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps setting to set the
lowest resolution where 60 fps is allowed. Below this threshold 30 fps is the maximum
frame rate.
Select which type of input source is connected to the video input. For single camera
systems, the integrated camera is connected to Connector 1. For dual camera systems, the
integrated cameras are connected to Connector 1 and Connector 2.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Medium
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1,2: camera Connector 3,4: PC Connector 5: other
Value space: Normal/Medium/High
Normal: Use this profile for a normally to poorly lit environment. Resolutions will be set
rather conservative.
Value space: Connector n: PC/camera/document_camera/mediaplayer/whiteboard/other
PC: Use this when a computer is connected to the video input.
Medium: Requires good and stable lighting conditions and a good quality video input. For
some call rates this leads to higher resolution.
camera: Use this when a camera is connected to the video input.
document_camera: Use this when a document camera is connected to the video input.
High: Requires nearly optimal video conferencing lighting conditions and a good quality
video input in order to achieve a good overall experience. Rather high resolutions will be
used.
mediaplayer: Use this when a media player is connected to the video input.
whiteboard: Use this when a whiteboard camera is connected to the video input.
other: Use this when the other options do not match.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
211
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
n: 1..5
n: 1..4
For each video input, this setting tells the system the lowest resolution where it can transmit
60 fps. So for all resolutions lower than this, the maximum transmitted frame rate would be
30 fps, while above this resolution 60fps would also be possible, if the available bandwidth
is adequate.
Define how the video system will behave when you connect a presentation source to the
video input. In general, any input source can be used as a presentation source; normally,
the main camera will not be used as a presentation source.
If the video system is in standby mode, it will wake up when you connect a presentation
source. Sharing the presentation with the far end requires additional action (select Share on
the user interface) except when this setting is set to AutoShare.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Default value: 1280_720
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: 512_288/768_448/1024_576/1280_720/1920_1080/Never
Default value: Connector 1,2: Manual Connector 3,4: OnConnect
512_288: Set the threshold to 512x288.
Value space: Connector 1: Manual Connector 2: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect
for single camera systems, and Manual for dual camera systems Connector 3,4:
AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect
768_448: Set the threshold to 768x448.
1024_576: Set the threshold to 1024x576.
1280_720: Set the threshold to 1280x720.
AutoShare: While in a call, the content on the video input will automatically be presented
to the far end as well as on the local screen when you connect the cable, or when the
source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from
sleep mode). You do not have to select Share on the user interface. If a presentation
source is already connected when you make or answer a call, you have to manually
select Share on the user interface.
1920_1080: Set the threshold to 1920x1080.
Never: Do not set a threshold for transmitting 60fps.
Desktop: The content on the video input will be presented on the screen when you
connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). This applies both when idle and in a
call. Also, the content on the video input will stay on the screen when you leave the call,
provided that it was the active input at the time of leaving.
Manual: The content on the video input will not be presented on the screen until you
select Share from the user interface.
OnConnect: The content on the video input will be presented on screen when you
connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). Otherwise, the behavior is the same
as in manual mode.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
212
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Input Connector [n] Quality
Video Input Connector [n] SignalType
n: 1..5
n: 5..5
When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off between high resolution and
high frame rate. For some video sources it is more important to transmit high frame rate
than high resolution and vice versa. This setting specifies whether to give priority to high
frame rate or to high resolution.
Connector 5 can be used for either S-Video or Composite video input format. Use this
setting to configure which video format the BNC connector(s) are used for.
If a Precision 60 camera is detected by the video system this setting is automatically set to
Motion. If a user changes this setting manually, it will be set back to Motion after a restart or
a camera reconnect.
Default value: Composite
Requires user role: ADMIN
Value space: Composite/YC
Composite: Connector 5 is configured for composite video input. Only the BNC
connector that is labeled "Y" is used.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1,2,5: Motion Connector 3,4: Sharpness
YC: Connector 5 is configured for S-Video input. Both BNC connectors ("Y" and "C")
are used.
Value space: Connector n: Motion/Sharpness
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher
frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are present or when there is a
lot of motion in the picture.
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility
n: 1..5
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest
quality of detailed images and graphics.
Define the visibility of the video input connector in the menus on the user interface.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
Default value: Connector 1,2,3: IfSignal Connector 4: Always Connector 5: Never
n: 1..4
Value space: Connector n: Always/IfSignal/Never
The devices connected to the video input should follow the rules for RGB video quantization
range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this
configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any source.
Always: The menu selection for the video input connector will always be visible on the
user interface.
IfSignal: Yhe menu selection for the video input connector will only be visible when
something is connected to the video input.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Never: The input source is not expected to be used as a presentation source, and will
not show up on the user interface.
Default value: Connector 1,2,3: Auto Connector 4: Full
Value space: Auto/Full/Limited
Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on video format according
to CEA-861-E. CE video formats will use limited quantization range levels. IT video
formats will use full quantization range levels.
Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code
values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
213
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Video Monitors
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode
A monitor role is assigned to each screen using the Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
setting. The monitor role decides which layout (call participants and presentation) will
appear on the screen that is connected to this output. Screens with the same monitor role
will get the same layout; screens with different monitor roles will have different layouts.
n: 2..2 for MX800 Single; not available for MX700 and MX800 Dual
Appendices
This video output (HDMI) supports Consumer Electronics Control (CEC).
When this setting is On, the system will use CEC to set the screen in standby when the
system itself enters standby. Likewise the system will wake up the screen when the system
itself wakes up from standby.
The monitor layout mode that is set in the Video Monitors setting should reflect the number
of different layouts you want in your room setup. Note that some screens can be reserved
for presentations.
Default value: Auto
Note that the different manufacturers uses different marketing names for CEC, for example
Anynet+ (Samsung); Aquos Link (Sharp); BRAVIA Sync (Sony); HDMI-CEC (Hitachi); Kuro
Link (Pioneer); CE-Link and Regza Link (Toshiba); RIHD (Onkyo); HDAVI Control, EZ-Sync,
VIERA Link (Panasonic); EasyLink (Philips); and NetCommand for HDMI (Mitsubishi).
Value space: Auto/Single/Dual/DualPresentationOnly/TriplePresentationOnly/Triple
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Off
Auto: The number of screens connected to the video system is automatically detected,
and the layout is distributed on the screens according to the monitor role.
Value space: Off/On
Single: The same layout is shown on all screens.
Off: CEC is disabled.
Dual: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First and Second. If a
presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with
monitor role First, and the presentation is shown on screens with monitor role Second.
On: CEC is enabled.
DualPresentationOnly: All participants in the call are shown on screens with monitor role
First. If a presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on screens with
monitor role Second.
Triple: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First, Second and Third.
Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First, and finally Third. If a
presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with
monitor role First and Second, and the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor
role Third.
TriplePresentationOnly: All participants in the call are distributed on screens with monitor
role First and Second. Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First. If a
presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor
role Third.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
214
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset
Video Output Connector [n] Location VerticalOffset
n: 1..3
n: 1..3
HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These
settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these
outputs.
HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These
settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these
outputs.
HorizontalOffset = 0 and VerticalOffset = 0 indicates that the display is positioned in center,
both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is
left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center.
A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical
offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how
far the display is from center (relative to other displays).
HorizontalOffset = 0 and VerticalOffset = 0 indicates that the display is positioned in center,
both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is
left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center.
A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical
offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how
far the display is from center (relative to other displays).
Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the
right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the
right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 1, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 1, VerticalOffset = 0
Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1
and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1
and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = 0
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = -1
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = 0, VerticalOffset = -1
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector 1: -1 Connector 2: 0 Connector 3: 1
Default value: Connector n: 0
Value space: Integer (-100..100)
Value space: Integer (-100..100)
Range: The value must be between -100 and 100.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Range: The value must be between -100 and 100.
215
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
System
System settings
settings
Maintenance
Appendices
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
Video Output Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
n: 1..3
n: 2..3 for MX800 Single; not available for MX700 and MX800 Dual
The monitor role describes which video streams will be shown on the screen connected to
this video output. Together the Video Monitors setting and the MonitorRole settings for all
outputs define which layout (video streams) will be shown on each screen.
Devices connected to an HDMI output should follow the rules for RGB video quantization
range defined in CEA-861. Unfortunately some devices do not follow the standard and this
configuration may be used to override the settings to get a perfect image with any display.
Most HDMI displays expects full quantization range.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Connector n: Auto
Default value: Full
Value space: Auto/First/Second/Third/PresentationOnly/Recorder
Value space: Auto/Full/Limited
Auto: The system will detect when a screen is connected, and a monitor role (First,
Second, Third) that corresponds with the Video Monitors setting will be assigned
automatically.
Auto: RGB quantization range is automatically selected based on the RGB Quantization
Range bits (Q0, Q1) in the AVI infoframe. If no AVI infoframe is available, RGB quantization
range is selected based on video format according to CEA-861-E.
First/Second/Third: Define the role of the screen in a multi-screen setup. In a singlescreen setup, there is no difference between First, Second and Third.
Full: Full quantization range. The R, G, B quantization range includes all code values (0 255). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
PresentationOnly: Show presentation video stream if active, and nothing else. Screens/
outputs with this monitor role are disregarded by the Video Monitors setting.
Limited: Limited Quantization Range. R, G, B quantization range that excludes some code
values at the extremes (16 - 235). This is defined in CEA-861-E.
Recorder: Show all participants, including the local main video (self-view). If active, also
show the presentation. Screens/outputs with this monitor role are ignored by the Video
Monitors setting.
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
Define the position on screen of the presentation picture-in-picture (PiP). The setting only
takes effect when the presentation is explicitly minimized to a PiP, for example using the
user interface. The setting takes effect from the next call onwards; if changed during a call,
it will have no effect on the current call.
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution
n: 2..3 for MX800 Single; not available for MX700 and MX800 Dual
Define the resolution and refresh rate for the connected screen.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Default value: Current
Default value: Connector n: Auto
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Value space: Connector n: Auto/1280_720_50/1280_720_60/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_
60/1920_1200_50/1920_1200_60
Current: The position of the presentation PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
Auto: The system will automatically try to set the optimal resolution based on negotiation
with the connected monitor.
UpperLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
UpperCenter: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper center position.
1280_720_50: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
UpperRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
1280_720_60: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
CenterLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the center left position.
1920_1080_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
CenterRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the center right position.
1920_1080_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
LowerLeft: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
1920_1200_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
LowerRight: The presentation PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
1920_1200_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
216
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Presentation DefaultSource
Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode
Define which video input source to use as a default presentation source. This setting may
be used by the API and 3rd party user interfaces. It is not relevant when using the user
interfaces provided by Cisco.
Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be shown in full screen or as a small
picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call. The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched
on (see the Video Selfview Default Mode setting).
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 3
Default value: Current
Value space: 1/2/3/4
Value space: Off/Current/On
The video input source to use as default presentation source.
Off: Self-view will be shown as a PiP.
Current: The size of the self-view picture will be kept unchanged when leaving a call, i.e.
if it was a PiP during the call, it remains a PiP after the call; if it was fullscreen during the
call, it remains fullscreen after the call.
Video Presentation Priority
On: The self-view picture will be shown in fullscreen.
Determine how to distribute the bandwidth between the presentation channel and the main
video channel.
Requires user role: ADMIN
Video Selfview Default Mode
Default value: Equal
Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be displayed on screen after a call. The
position and size of the self-view window is determined by the Video Selfview Default
PIPPosition and the Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode settings respectively.
Value space: Equal/High/Low
Equal: The available bandwidth is shared equally between the presentation channel and
the main video channel.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
High: The presentation channel is assigned a larger portion of the available bandwidth at
the expense of the main video channel.
Default value: Current
Value space: Off/Current/On
Low: The main video channel is assigned a larger portion of the available bandwidth at
the expense of the presentation channel.
Off: Self-view is switched off when leaving a call.
Current: Self-view is left as is, i.e. if it was on during the call, it remains on after the call;
if it was off during the call, it remains off after the call.
On: Self-view is switched on when leaving a call.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
217
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole
Video Selfview OnCall Mode
Define which screen/output to display the main video source (self-view) after a call. The
value reflects the monitor roles set for the different outputs in the Video Output Connector
[n] MonitorRole setting.
This setting is used to switch on self-view for a short while when setting up a call. The
Video Selfview OnCall Duration setting determines for how long it remains on. This applies
when self-view in general is switched off.
The setting applies both when self-view is displayed in full screen, and when it is displayed
as picture-in-picture (PiP).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: On
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Value space: Off/On
Default value: Current
Off: Self-view is not shown automatically during call setup.
Value space: Current/First/Second/Third
On: Self-view is shown automatically during call setup.
Current: When leaving a call, the self-view picture will be retained on the same output as
it was during the call.
Video Selfview OnCall Duration
First: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector [n]
MonitorRole set to First.
This setting only has an effect when the Video Selfview OnCall Mode setting is switched
On. In this case, the number of seconds set here determines for how long self-view is
shown before it is automatically switched off.
Second: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output
Connector [n] MonitorRole set to Second.
Third: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with the Video Output Connector
[n] MonitorRole set to Third.
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: 10
Video Selfview Default PIPPosition
Value space: Integer (1..60)
Range: Choose for how long self-view remains on. The valid range is between 1 and 60
seconds.
Define the position on screen of the small self-view picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call.
The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched on (see the Video Selfview
Default Mode setting) and fullscreen view is switched off (see the Video Selfview Default
FullscreenMode setting).
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Default value: Current
Value space: Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/
LowerLeft/LowerRight
Current: The position of the self-view PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
UpperLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
UpperCenter: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper center position.
UpperRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
CenterLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the center left position.
CentreRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the center right position.
LowerLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
218
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System
System settings
settings
Appendices
Experimental settings
The Experimental settings are for testing only and should not be used unless agreed with
Cisco. These settings are not documented and WILL change in later releases.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
219
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Appendices
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
220
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
How to use Touch 10
The Touch 10 user interface and its use are described in
full detail in the User guide for the video system.
Tap ? to contact Help desk or access other
facility services, if available.
Tap the system name or contact
information to access System
Information, Settings, Restart
and Factory reset. You can also
activate Call forwarding, Standby,
and Do not disturb modes.
Time of day.
Tap Call to make a
call, and to invoke the
Favorites, Directory and
Recents contact lists.
Tap Share to start
sharing content and to
conduct presentations.
Tap Messages to invoke
the voice mail system, if
available.
Entry point for user interface
extensions (your system
may have zero or more such
buttons with different color,
text and icons).
Press and hold the
left side of the Volume
button to decrease the
loudspeaker volume and
the right side to increase
the volume.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Tap the Camera icon to activate
self-view and camera control.
Press the Microphone
button to mute and unmute
microphones.
221
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Set up remote monitoring
Requirement:
•
RemoteMonitoring option
Remote monitoring is useful when you want to control the video
system from another location.
Snapshots from input sources appear in the web interface, so you
can check the camera view and control the camera without being
in the room.
If enabled, snapshots are refreshed automatically approximately
every 5 seconds.
Check whether or not the video system has the
RemoteMonitoring option
About snapshots
1. Sign in to the web interface.
Local input sources
2. Check the Home page to see if RemoteMonitoring is on the
list of Installed options.
Snapshots of the local input sources
of the video system appear on the Call
Control page.
If not on the list, remote monitoring is not available.
Snapshots appear both when the video
system is idle, and when in a call.
Enable remote monitoring
Install the RemoteMonitoring option key. How to install option keys
are described in the ► Add option keys chapter.
PLEASE BE AWARE THAT IF YOU ENABLE THE REMOTE MONITORING
OPTION YOU MUST MAKE SURE THAT YOU COMPLY WITH LOCAL
LAWS AND REGULATIONS WITH REGARD TO PRIVACY AND PROVIDE
ADEQUATE NOTICE TO USERS OF THE SYSTEM THAT THE SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR MAY MONITOR AND CONTROL THE CAMERA AND
SCREEN. IT IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO COMPLY WITH PRIVACY
REGULATIONS WHEN USING THE SYSTEM AND CISCO DISCLAIMS ALL
LIABILITY FOR ANY UNLAWFUL USE OF THIS FEATURE.
Far end snapshots
When in call, you may also see snapshots
from the far end camera. It does not
matter whether or not the far end video
system has the RemoteMonitoring option.
Far end snapshots are not displayed if the
call is encrypted.
Automatically refresh snapshots
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
222
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Access call information and answer a call while using the web interface
Notification of an incoming call
Click the Call indicator to open the Call
Control page, where you can accept or
decline the call.
The system is in a call
The badge indicates the number of
active calls.
Control the call
Call indicator
Relevant control buttons are present on the
Call Control page. Use the buttons to:
The call indicator is present to notify you about an incoming call,
and to show when the system is in a call.
Show call details
If the system is idle, there is no call indicator.
Put the call on hold
Answer the call
Disconnect the call
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
223
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Place a call using the web interface (page 1 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Send DTMF tones
Place a call
Click to open a key pad that you can use if your application
requires DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) signaling.
Even if the web interface is used to initiate the call, it is the
video system (display, microphones and loudspeakers)
that is used for the call; it is not the PC running the web
interface.
1. Navigate the Favorites, Directory or Recents lists to find the
correct entry; or enter one or more characters in the Search
or Dial field*. Click the correct contact name.
2. Click Call in the contact card.
Alternatively, enter the complete URI or number in the Search and
Dial field. Then click the Call button that appears next to the URI
or number.
Show/hide call details
Click the information button to show details about the
call.
Click the button again to hide the information.
Hold and resume a call
Use the
button next to a participant’s name to put
that participant on hold.
To resume the call, use the
button that is present
when a participant is on hold.
End a call
If you want to terminate a call or conference, click
Disconnect all. Confirm your choice in the dialog that
appears.
*
When searching, matching entries from the Favorites, Directory and Recents
lists will be listed as you type.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
To disconnect just one participant in a conference,
click the
button for that participant.
224
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Place a call using the web interface (page 2 of 2)
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Calling more than one
A point-to-point video call (a call involving two parties only) can
be expanded to include one more participant on audio-only.
If your system is using the optional built-in MultiSite feature, up
to five participants, yourself included, can join the video call
(conference). In addition, one more participant can join on audioonly.
Follow the same procedure to call the next conference participant
as you did when calling the first participant.
Calling more than one using a conference bridge (CUCM ad hoc
conferencing) is not supported from the web interface, even if it is
supported by the video system itself.
Adjust the volume
Mute the microphone
Click Microphone: On to mute the microphone.
Then the text changes to Microphone: Off.
Click Microphone: Off to unmute.
Volume down
Volume up
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
225
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Share content using the web interface
About content sharing
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Share content
Presentation source
drop down list
1. Choose which content source to share in
the Presentation source drop down list.
Choose which input
source to share, from the
drop down list.
2. Click Start Presentation. Then the text
changes to Stop Presentation.
Stop content sharing:
Click the Stop Presentation button that is
present while sharing.
Snapshot area
Shows snapshots of the
selected presentation
source.
You can connect a presentation source
to one of the video inputs of your video
system. Most often a PC is used as
presentation source, but other options
may be available depending on your
system setup.
While in a call you can share content with
the other participant(s) in the call (far
end).
If you are not in a call, the content is
shown locally.
Only available on video
systems that have the
Remote Monitoring
option.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
226
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Local layout control
About layouts
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
The term layout is used to describe the
various ways presentations and videos
can appear on the screens. Different
types of meetings may require different
layouts.
The number of call or conference
participants are reflected in the available
choices.
Change the layout
Click Layout, and choose your preferred
layout in the window that opens.
The set of layouts to choose from
depends on the system configuration.
You may change the layout both when idle
and in a call.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
227
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Control a local camera
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Prerequisites
•
The Video > Input > Connector n > CameraControl >
Mode setting is switched On .
•
The camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality.
•
Speaker tracking is switched Off.
Main source drop down list
Choose which camera to control from
the drop down list.
Snapshot area
Shows snapshots of the selected main input source.
Only available on video systems that have the
Remote Monitoring option.
Automatically refresh snapshots
Move the camera to a preset position
1. Choose which camera to control in the Main
source drop down list.
2. Click Presets... to open a list of available
presets.
Move the camera using the pan/tilt/zoom controls
Camera control is not available when speaker tracking is
switched on.
If no presets are defined, the button is
disabled and named No presets.
1. Choose which camera to control in the Main source drop
down list.
3. Click a preset’s name to move the camera to
the preset position.
2. Click the camera icon to open the camera control
window.
4. Click Close to close the window.
Video snapshots from the room are only displayed for
video systems that have the Remote Monitoring option.
You cannot use the web interface to
define a preset; you should use the
Touch controller.
3. Use the left and right arrows to pan the camera; the up
and down arrows to tilt it; and + and - to zoom in and out.
When you select a preset, speaker
tracking will be switched off
automatically.
Only relevant controls appear in the window.
4. Click Close to close the window.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
228
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Control a far end camera
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Call Control.
Prerequisites
While in a call, you can control the remote participant’s camera
(far end) provided that:
•
The Conference > FarEndControl > Mode setting is switched
On on the far end video system.
•
The far end camera has pan, tilt or zoom functionality. Only
the relevant controls will appear.
•
Speaker tracking is not switched On on the far end camera.
•
The local video system has the Remote Monitoring option.
Control the remote participant’s camera
1. Click the camera icon to open the remote
camera control window.
2. Use the left and right arrows to pan the
camera; the up and down arrows to tilt it; and
+ and - to zoom in and out.
If you are not allowed to control the far end
camera, the controls will not appear in the
image.
If the call is encrypted, the far end snapshot
behind the controls are not displayed.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
229
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Packet loss resilience - ClearPath
ClearPath introduces several mechanisms for advanced packet
loss resilience. These mechanisms increase the experienced
quality when you use your video system in an error prone
environment.
ClearPath is a Cisco proprietary protocol. All endpoints running
CE software support ClearPath.
If the involved endpoints and infrastructure elements support
ClearPath, all packet loss resilience mechanisms are used in
point-to-point connections (including hosted conferences). Only
some of the mechanisms are supported in MultiSite conferences.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
230
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Room analytics
The room analytics feature use several
variables from the conference room
and re-uses them to analyze the room
utilization over time or per call.
People presence detection
Status
The video system has the capability to find whether or not people
are present in the room. It takes a minimum of two minutes to
detect whether people are present or not in the room. After the
room becomes vacant, it may take up to two minutes for the
status to change.
You may see the status at a given moment of people’s presence
and people count. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to
Setup > Status > RoomAnalytics.
This feature is based on ultrasound. It will not keep record of who
was in the room, only whether or not there are people present in
the room.
You can turn the people presence detection on or off
from the web interface. Sign in to the web interface, and
navigate to Setup > Configuration > RoomAnalytics >
PeoplePresenceDetector.
Diagnostics
You can see the live people counter on-screen by enabling the
SpeakerTrack Diagnostics mode from the Touch 10 controller.
Turn on selfview, and tap the contact information in the upper left
corner of the Touch controller and open the Settings menu. Tap
Issues & diagnostics and switch on SpeakerTrack diagnostics.
Call history command
People count
Applies to systems with dual camera (speaker tracking).
By using face detection, the video system can find how many
persons are in the room. It will not keep record of who was in
the room, only the average number of faces that were detected.
Persons that have not faced the camera will not be counted. If
there are objects or pictures in the room that can be detected as
faces these might be counted.
After a call the average people count value can be extracted from
the Call History command.
•
xCommand CallHistory Get DetailLevel: Full
The Call History command is available from the API (Application
Programming Interface). Refer to the API Reference Guide for your
product to for details.
Go to: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
The call must have a duration of minimum two minutes in order
to get a reliable average. Calls that last less than two minutes,
and calls which are made with people count disabled, will display
“N/A” when you retrive call history.
By default, the video system only counts people when in a call, or
when it displays the self-view picture.
You can choose to count people outside of call. When enabled,
the video system counts people as long as the video system is
not in standby mode. This includes outside of call, even if selfview is off. Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Setup >
Configuration > RoomAnalytics > PeopleCountOutOfCall.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
231
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Customization
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface
You can customize the user interface to allow control of
peripherals in a meeting room, for example lights and blinds, or to
modify the video system’s behavior by triggering macros.
This allows for the powerful combination of a control system’s
functionality and the video system's user-friendly user interface
(Touch 10).
(page 1 of 2)
In-room control architecture
You need a Cisco video system with a Touch 10 controller, and a
control system. The control system may be a third-party system,
such as Crestron or AMX, with hardware drivers for peripherals.
It is the control system, not the video system, that controls the
peripherals.
When you program the control system you must use the video
system’s API (events and commands) in order to connect with the
controls on the video system's user interface.
Blinds
API
Touch 10
Climate
Control system
Video system
Example in-room control panel
Consult the Customization guide for full details about how to
design custom user interface panels (in-room control panels)
using the In-Room Control editor, and how to use the video
system’s API to program the in-room controls. Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Lights
In-room
control
editor
Other...
In-room control schematics
The video system’s macro framework may also serve as a
control system. In this case the control system can use the video
system’s API to trigger all sorts of local functionality: Speed dial,
language selection, customized system reset, and much more.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
232
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Customization
Customize the video system's Touch 10 user interface
(page 2 of 2)
The In-Room Control editor
The room simulator
Free of charge editor
Preview function
An easy to use drag-and-drop editor, which you should
use to compose the custom user interface panels (inroom control panels), comes free of charge with the video
system’s software.
The editor also provides a preview function, which allows
you to see how the custom interfaces will appear on the
user interface.
Sign in* to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
In‑Room Control.
•
Click Launch Editor to launch the editor directly from
the video system’s web interface.
You can push a new in-room control panel to the
video system, and see the result immediately on the
Touch controller.
•
Back up any existing in-room configuration
you may have before you export the simulator
configuration to the video system. The
simulator configuration will replace the existing
configuration on the video system.
The preview function is also a complete software version
of your custom (in-room control) panels, so clicking the
controls will result in the same actions as selecting them
on the real Touch 10 user interface.
Therefore, you can use the preview function to test your
integrations without having a real Touch 10 user interface
available. You can also use the video system’s in-room
controls from a remote location
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration >
In‑Room Control.
•
Click Launch Simulator to open a room simulator in
your browser.
The room simulator contains a predefined in-room
control configuration that you can export to the video
system. Then you can control the simulator’s virtual
meeting room from your real Touch 10 user interface.
Click Download Editor to download a stand-alone
version that you can run locally on your browser from
your hard drive.
•
Then you can compose your custom interfaces
without being connected to a video system. You can
export and import to file to move your work between
your local version and the video system later.
*
You can use the room simulator to visualise how the inroom controls on the Touch 10 user interface changes the
state of the room.
Click Load simulator config to export the simulator
configuration to the video system.
You need a user that holds the ROOMCONTROL, INTEGRATOR, or
ADMIN user roles in order to access the In-Room Control editor and
the API commands that you need when programming the control
system.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
233
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Customization
Customize the video system's behavior using macros
With macros, you can create your own snippets of code that run
on the video system. The language is JavaScript / ECMAScript 6
with support for features such as arrow functions, promises and
classes.
Allow using macros on the video system
The Macro editor
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Configuration.
The Macro editor is a powerful tool where
you can:
•
The macro framework allows an integrator to write scripts that
tailor a video system's behavior to suite an individual customer's
requirements. The integrators can, for example, implement
their own features or variations of features, automate specific
configurations or re-configurations, and create custom tests and
monitoring functions.
Set Macros > Mode to On.
If you try to launch the Macro editor while this setting is Off, a
pop-up message appears. If you respond by tapping Enable
Macros, the Macros > Mode setting will automatically change
to On, and the editor will launch.
Launch the macro editor
By combining the use of macros and creation of a custom user
interface panel (formerly referred to as in-room control panel), you
can amend the user interface (Touch 10) to trigger customized
local functionality. For examples:
•
Add speed dialling buttons
•
Add a button for room reset, which set all configurations back
to your preferred default setup
Sign in* to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > Macro
Editor.
We don't offer a stand-alone version of the editor that you can
use to work offline.
•
Load our code examples, which
you can modify, use as is, or use as
inspiration when writing your own
macros.
•
Read our detailed macro scripting
tutorial, which also explains the code
examples in more detailed.
•
Write your own macros, and upload
them to the video system.
•
Enable/Disable individual macros.
•
Check in an embedded Log Console
what happens when you run a macro.
Consult the Customization guide for details about macros and how
to use the video system's built in Macro editor. Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
You need a user that holds the ADMIN user role in order to access the Macro
editor.
234
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Customization
Remove default buttons from the user interface
In some use cases, you may never use a default button, like
Call or Share. Such unused buttons may cause confusion. In
these cases, you can remove the unused buttons from the user
interface. Custom In-Room Control panels can be exposed still.
Removing default buttons while adding custom buttons makes it
possible fully to customize the user interface.
For example, you can remove the Call and Share buttons if
nobody is going to share content or call from this video system.
Instead, add custom buttons (In-Room Controls) for the tasks that
are going to be performed.
Configurations
Further Information
Use the following configurations to remove default buttons from
the user interface. The configurations are available both from the
web interface of the video system, and in the API.
Find more details about how to remove
buttons and customize the user interface
in the Customization guide. Go to:
•
UserInterface > Features > Call > Start: Removes the default
Call button (including the directory, favorites, and recent calls
lists). Also removes the Add participant button while in a call.
•
UserInterface > Features > Call > VideoMute: Removes the
default Turn video off button.
•
UserInterface > Features > Share > Start: Removes the default
user interface for sharing and previewing content, both in call
and out of call.
•
UserInterface > Features > HideAll: Removes all the default
buttons. In-Room Control panels are not removed.
•
UserInterface > Features > Call > End: Removes the End Call
button.
•
UserInterface > Features > Call > MidCallControls: Removes
the Hold, Resume, and Transfer in-call buttons.
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-roomcontrol-docs
The configurations remove only the buttons, not the
functionality as such. You can share content using
Proximity, even if you have removed the Share button
from the user interface.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
235
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Customization
Sending HTTP(S) Post and Put requests
Allowing HTTPS without certificate
validation
Network
API
Third-party service
xCommand HttpClient Post/Put
HTTP(S) server
Video system, HTTP(S) client
This feature makes it possible to send arbitrary HTTP(S)
Post and Put requests from a video system to an HTTP(S)
server.
By using macros, you can send data to an HTTP(S) server
whenever you want. You can choose what data to send,
and structure them as you like. This way you can adapt the
data to an already established service.
Security measures:
•
The HTTP(S) Post/Put feature is disabled by default. A
system administrator must explicitly enable the feature
by setting HttpClient > Mode to On.
•
The system administrator can prevent the use of HTTP
by setting HttpClient > AllowHTTP to False.
•
The system administrator can specify a list of HTTP(S)
servers that the device is allowed to send data to.
•
The number of concurrent Post and Put requests is
limited.
When sending requests over HTTPS, the video system
checks the certificate of the HTTPS server by default. If
the HTTPS server certificate is not found to be valid, you
get an error message. The video system doesn’t send
any data to that server.
We recommend using HTTPS with certificate validation.
If this is not possible, the system administrator can set
HttpClient > AllowInsecureHTTPS to On, which allows the
use of HTTPS without validating the server’s certificate.
List of Allowed HTTP(S) Servers
The system administrator can use these commands to set
up and maintain a list of up to ten allowed HTTP(S) servers
(hosts):
xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Add
Expression: <Regular expression that matches
the host name or IP address of the HTTP(S)
server>
• xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Clear
• xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname List
• xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Remove Id:
<id of an entry in the list>
•
If the list is not empty, you can send HTTP(S) requests only
to the servers in the list. If the list is empty, you can send
the requests to any HTTP(S) server.
The check against the list of allowed servers is performed
both when using insecure (HTTP) and secure (HTTPS)
transfer of data.
Sending HTTP(S) Requests
Once the HTTP(S) Client Post feature is enabled, you
can use the following commands to send Post and Put
requests to an HTTP(S) server:
xCommand HttpClient Post [AllowInsecureHTTPS:
<True/False>] [Header: <Header text>]
Url: <URL to send the request to>
• xCommand HttpClient Put [AllowInsecureHTTPS:
<True/False>] [Header: <Header text>]
Url: <URL to send the request to>
•
These are multiline commands. Read the API guide to find
out how to use multiline commands, and also to find a
detailed description of the command parameters.
Further Information
Find more information about HTTP(S) Post requests in the
Customization guide. Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
236
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Input source composition
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
(page 1 of 2)
You can use the video system’s API to combine up to four input
sources in a single main video stream.
Source composition
Layouts
The maxmium number of different input sources depends on the
video system:
Composition layout
Equal
Video system
Maximum number of
different input sources
You can choose between three layouts:
•
Equal
•
•
Prominent
PIP (only available when composing two input sources)
Room Kit, SX20, MX200 G2,
MX300 G2
2
Codec Plus, Room 55,
Room 55 Dual, Room 70
3
You can modify the PIP position to one of the corners. The size of
the PIP can be normal or large.
4
The composition and layout can be modified at any time, both in
call and outside of call.
SX80, MX700, MX800,
Codec Pro, Room 70 G2
SX10, DX70, DX80
Not applicable
Number of sources: 2
Prominent
Selfview
Selfview shows the same composed image that is being sent to
the far end.
Individual camera control
Number of sources: 2
You can control individual cameras using API commands
(xCommand Camera *), but you cannot use the controls on the
user interface.
Picture-in-Picture (PIP)
When you select a camera in the user interface, the main video
stream will automatically switch from the composed video stream
to the single stream from the chosen camera.
Change compositions and layouts on demand
Input source composition is only available using API commands;
we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
Lower right corner
To be able to easily change compositions and layouts on demand,
we recommend that you use macros and create a custom user
interface panel (in-room control panel) for it.
Lower right corner, large PIP
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
237
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Input source composition
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
(page 2 of 2)
API command
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource
ConnectorId: <1..n> SourceId: <1..m>
Layout: <Equal, PIP, Prominent>
PIPPosition <LowerLeft, LowerRight,
UpperLeft, UpperRight>
PIPSize <Auto, Large>
Examples
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 ConnectorId: 3 ConnectorId: 4 Layout: Equal
where
The input source can be identified by either
the physical connector that it is connected
to (ConnectorId), or by the logical source
identifier (SourceId). There cannot be a
mix of different types of identifiers in the
same command; use either ConnectorId or
SourceId. You can find these identifiers in
the Video Input Connector and Video Input
Source statuses.
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource SourceId: 1 SourceId: 2 Layout: PIP PIPPosition: LowerRight PIPSize: Large
The difference between the equal, PIP, and
prominent layouts (Layout) are shown in the
sidebar.
You can modify the PIP position to one of the
corners. The size of the PIP can be normal
(auto) or large.
xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource SourceId: 1 SourceId: 2 SourceId: 3 SourceId: 4 Layout: Prominent
Refer to the API-guide for more details.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
238
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
Presentation source composition (page 1 of 2)
You can use the video system’s API to combine up to four
presentation sources in a single video stream.
Source composition
Layouts
The maxmium number of different presentation sources depends
on the video system:
Composition layout
Equal
Video system
Maximum number of
different
presentation sources
You can choose between two layouts:
•
Equal
•
Prominent
Room Kit, SX20, MX200 G2,
MX300 G2
2
You can change the number of sources at any time, both in call
and outside of call. The image sizes cannot be modified.
Codec Plus, Room 55,
Room 55 Dual, Room 70
3
SX80, MX700, MX800,
Codec Pro, Room 70 G2
4
The order in which the sources appear on the screen depends
on the order they have in the command; starting from upper left,
ending at bottom right.
SX10, DX70, DX80
Not applicable
You can only share sources that has been shared through a cable
(DVI, VGA, HDMI - depending on the video system).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Number of sources: 2
Prominent
Change compositions and layouts on demand
Presentation source composition is only available using API
commands; we don’t provide a dedicated user interface for it.
To be able to easily change compositions and layouts on demand,
we recommend that you use macros and create a custom user
interface panel (in-room control panel) for it.
239
Number of sources: 2
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Presentation source composition (page 2 of 2)
API command
xCommand Presentation Start
ConnectorId: <1..n>
PresentationSource: <1..n>
Instance: <New, 1..n>
Layout: <Equal, Prominent>
SendingMode: <LocalRemote, LocalOnly>
Examples
xCommand Presentation Start PresentationSource: 1 PresentationSource: 2 Layout: Equal
where
The input source can be identified by either
the physical connector that it is connected
to (ConnectorId), or by the logical source
identifier (PresentationSource). There
cannot be a mix of different types of
identifiers in the same command; use either
ConnectorId or PresentationSource. You
can find these identifiers in the Video Input
Connector and Video Input Source statuses.
xCommand Presentation Start ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 Layout: Prominent
Refer to the API-guide for more details.
xCommand Presentation Start ConnectorId: 1 ConnectorId: 2 ConnectorId: 3 Layout: Equal
xCommand Presentation Start PresentationSource: 1 PresentationSource: 2 PresentationSource: 3 Layout: Prominent
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
240
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Manage startup scripts
About startup scripts
Sign in to the web interface, and navigate to Integration > Startup
Scripts.
A startup script contains commands
(xCommand) and configurations
(xConfiguration) that will be executed as
part of the start up procedure.
A few commands and configurations
cannot be placed in a startup script,
for example xCommand SystemUnit
Boot. It is not possible to save a script
that contains illegal commands and
configurations.
List of startup scripts
You can create one or
more startup scripts*.
A green dot appears next
to an active startup script;
a red ring appears next to
an inactive startup script.
If you have more than one
startup script, they will
run in the order from top
to bottom of the list.
Syntax and semantics for xCommand and
xConfiguration are explained in the API
guide for the product.
The script names and configurations shown in the illustration serve as examples. You may make your own scripts.
Creat a startup script
1. Click Create new....
2. Enter a name for the startup script in
the title input field.
3. Enter the commands (xConfiguration
or xCommand) in the command
input area. Start each command on
a new line.
4. Click Save.
5. Click On to activate the startup
script.
If you want to use an existing script as
a starting point for editing, select that
script and click Copy.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Run a startup script immediately
1. Select the startup script from the list.
2. Click Run.
Both active and inactive startup scripts
can be run immediately.
Activate or deactivate a startup script
1. Select the startup script from the list.
2. Click On to activate, or Off to deactivate a script.
Active startup scripts will run every time the
video system starts up.
Delete a startup script
1. Select the startup script from the list.
2. Click Delete.
241
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Access the video system’s XML files
About the API
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration >
Developer API.
The XML files are part of the video system’s API. They structure
information about the system in a hierarchy.
•
Configuration.xml contains the current system settings
(configuration). These settings are controlled from the web
interface or from the API (Application Programmer Interface).
•
The information in status.xml is constantly updated by the
video system to reflect system and process changes. The
status information is monitored from the web interface or from
the API.
•
Command.xml contains an overview of the commands
available to instruct the system to perform an action. The
commands are issued from the API.
•
Valuespace.xml contains an overview of all the value spaces
of system settings, status information, and commands.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Open an XML file
Click the file name to open the XML file.
242
The application programming interface
(API) is a tool for integration professionals
and developers working with the video
system. The API is described in detail in
the API guide for the video system.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Execute API commands and configurations from the web interface
About the API
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Integration >
Developer API.
The application programming interface
(API) is a tool for integration professionals
and developers working with the video
system. The API is described in detail in
the API guide for the video system.
Commands (xCommand) and configurations (xConfiguration) can
be executed from the web interface. Syntax and semantics are
explained in the API guide for the video system.
Execute API commands and configurations
1. Enter a command (xCommand or xConfiguration),
or a sequence of commands, in the text area.
2. Click Execute to issue the command(s).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
243
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Advanced customization of audio
Sign in to the web interface and navigate to Setup > Audio
Console.
The Audio Console is replacing the CE
Console application that was available
for SX80 in previous releases. The CE
Console is no longer maintained
This opens the Audio Console utility, which is embedded in the
web interface of the video system. This utility is available for the
following products: SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Pro (including
Room Kit Pro), and Room 70 G2.
The Audio Console provides a graphical interface to advanced
customizable audio features. It lets you define how to connect
audio inputs to outputs, using simple drag and drop techniques.
The main features of the Audio Console are:
•
Configure the audio system of the codec
•
Change the default mixing, routing and equalizers
•
Set various input and output connector properties
•
Configure advanced features such as local reinforcement
See the Customization guide for details about the Audio Console.
Go to:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
We also recommend you to read the ► Using extra loudspeakers
and local reinforcement chapter for more information about a
good auditory experience.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
244
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Notes regarding screen technology
Cisco are using professional screens in MX700 and MX800.
These screens have longer lifetime and operating hours than
consumer screens.
MX700 and MX800 use LED edge backlit LCD panels with
Vertical Alignment technology. This allows for high contrast
ratios and fast response times. The nature of all LCD panels is
that the contrast ratio drops rapidly with an increasing viewing
angle (both horizontally and vertically). Color coordinates will
also change with increased viewing angle resulting in some
color shift. LCD panels may therefore appear to have different
shades when comparing images viewed perpendicular and at
an angle to the screen.
MX700 and MX800 screens are individually color calibrated
during manufacturing using spectrometers. This ensures
that all screens shipped from the manufacturing site are
equal with respect to color reproduction, when judged on
axis. The calibration process has some tolerances, but this
is considered to be hard, if not impossible, to judge with the
naked eye. A small change in the viewing angle will to a larger
extent affect the perceived color differences.
Over time the screen’s LED backlights will drift. This is valid
for all LCD panels with LED backlight. Luminance will decay
resulting in darker image over time. For the LCD panels in
MX700 and MX800, the luminance will be halved after 50000
operating hours.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
245
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
GPIO interface
The codec within the video system has a General Purpose Input/
Output (GPIO) port in the form of a 6 pin Euroblock connector.
Some MX700/MX800 systems have been shipped with
the label for the pins of the GPIO port in reverse order.
Correct GPIO labeling.
Incorrect GPIO labeling.
GPIO port
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
246
Remove the left side
cover to get access to
the connectors.
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
About Ethernet ports
The main network port
The main network port - Network port 1 - is always reserved for
the connection to LAN. This applies to all video systems.
Depending on the video system, Network port 1 is marked with
the number 1, the network symbol ( ), or both.
Auxiliary network ports
Some video systems have more than one network port. The
additional ports can be used for peripheral devices like cameras,
Touch 10, third-party control systems, and more.
Product
Number of auxiliary
network ports
Number of auxiliary
network ports with PoE
Room Kit
1
0
Room Kit Mini
1
1(
)
A device that is connected to such a network port gets a local IP
address from the codec, and therefore is not part of the corporate
network. It is not possible for packets to traverse the codec
between the main network port (LAN) and the auxiliary network
ports (link-local).
Room 55
1
1(
)
Room 70 / Room 55 Dual
2
1(
)
Room 70 G2
4
2(
, PoE)
Codec Plus
2
1(
)
, PoE)
•
A Cisco peripheral device is assigned a dynamic IP address in
the range (DHCP): 169.254.1.41 to 169.254.1.240
Codec Pro
4
2(
•
A non-Cisco device is assigned the dynamic IP address
(DHCP): 169.254.1.30
SX10
0
0
NOTE: Only one non-Cisco device can get a dynamic IP
address at a time.
SX20
0
0
SX80
2
0
MX200 G2 / MX300 G2
2
0
MX700 / MX800
2
0*
DX70 / DX80
1
0
•
A non-Cisco device can be assigned a static IP address in the
range: 169.254.1.241 to 169.254.1.254
This method can also be used to connect to the codec with SSH.
In this case you can use the IP address 169.254.1.1.
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Some of the auxiliary network ports provide Power over Ethernet
(PoE). These ports can power peripherals like the Touch 10
controller.
*
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
These products have a separate PoE injector that is connected to one of the auxiliary network ports.
The PoE injector is used for the Touch 10 controller.
247
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
Appendices
Appendices
System settings
Serial interface
The video system has a standard COM-port for serial
communication. Connect a standard 9-pin RS-232 serial cable
to the COM-port. If the computer does not have a standard serial
connector, you need an RS-232 adapter on the computer side.
Computer
COM
(9-pin, male)
USB
RS-232 adapter
COM
(9-pin, female)
COM
(9-pin, male)
Serial cable
Video
system
The serial connection can be used without an IP-address, DNS, or
a network.
Parameters:
•
Baud rate: Configurable. Default 115200 bps
•
Data bits: 8
•
Parity: None
•
Stop bit: 1
•
Hardware flow control: Off
Standard COM-port
(9-pin, female)
Video system settings
Serial communication is enabled by default. Use the following
configuration to change the behavior:
SerialPort > Mode
For security reasons, you are asked to sign in before using the
serial interface. Use the following setting to change the behavior:
SerialPort > LoginRequired
We recommend using the default baud rate because the video
system may give much feedback. Use the following setting if you
want to adjust the baud rate.
SerialPort > BaudRate
Restart the video system when you have made changes to the
serial port settings.
If your video system is provisioned by CUCM, the serial port
settings should be configured from CUCM.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
Remove the left side
cover to get access to
the connectors.
248
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Open TCP Ports
The web server within the codec prohibit or restrict the use of
nonsecure or unnecessary ports, protocols, modules, and/or
services. Some ports are open or closed by default.
TCP 22: SSH
You can close the port by setting SSH mode to Off.
TCP 4051: Remote pairing session connection
The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is
remote paired with the video system. You can close the port by
setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
NetworkServices SSH Mode: Off / On
TCP 4052: Remote pairing and forwarding
TCP 80: HTTP
The port is only available (and open) when a Touch panel is
remote paired with the video system. You can close the port by
setting remote pairing for the Touch panel to Off.
You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off or HTTPS.
NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off
TCP 443: HTTPS
You can close the port by setting HTTP mode to Off.
NetworkServices HTTP Mode: HTTP+HTTPS / HTTPS / Off
TCP 4043: Remote pairing software download
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
TCP 4045: Remote pairing version information
The system settings are configured from
the Setup > Configuration page on the
web interface. Open a web browser and
enter the IP address of the video system
then sign in.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
TCP 4053: Remote pairing port
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
TCP 5060/5061: SIP listen ports
The SIP listen pors are open by default. The SIP listen ports are
disabled by the Cisco UCM (Unified Communication Manager).
You can close the ports by setting the SIP listen ports to Off.
SIP ListenPort: Off / On
You can close the port by setting remote pairing for the Touch
panel to Off.
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: Off / On
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
249
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
HTTPFeedback address from TMS
When a video system is added to Cisco TelePresence
Management Suite (TMS), it is automatically configured to
send information (events) back to TMS. The video system
receives the address, that these events should be sent to, from
TMS (HTTPFeedback address). If this address is absent or
misconfigured, the video system cannot send events to TMS.
Missing response to events
If the video system does not receive a response to an event, it will
retry sending it to the HTTPFeedback address up to 6 times at
increasing intervals.
If the video system does not receive a response to any of
the retries, the endpoint tries to send a message to the
HTTPFeedback address every ten minutes. The HTTPFeedback
status will indicate that it has failed, and there is a diagnostic
message indicating the type of failure.
While retrying to send messages, there will be a loss of Call Detail
Records (CDR) on TMS.
Get a new HTTPFeedback address from TMS
In order to get a new address to send events to, you must restart
the video system and wait for the next management address push
from TMS (scheduled or triggered by the TMS administrator).
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
250
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 1 of 4)
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
MX700 and MX800 Single:
• Cisco TelePresence Software Version TC7.1.2 or
later
• Collaboration Endpoint Software Version 8.0 or later
•
•
•
•
PC AND SECOND-SOURCE VIDEO INPUT
• DVI-I
• Two HDMI (if Dual camera option is installed, only
one HDMI)
• One standard definition (composite or S-video)
MX800 Dual:
• Cisco TelePresence Software Version TC7.3.1 or
later
• Collaboration Endpoint Software Version 8.0 or later
SUPPORTED PC INPUT RESOLUTIONS
COMPONENTS
• SVGA (800 x 600) up to 1080p (1920 x 1080)
Fully integrated unit including:
• Codec
• Display
• Camera (2 cameras as option)
• Loudspeakers
• Cisco TelePresence Table Microphone 60 (two
microphones are included in base package)
• Cables included: DVI-I-to-VGA cable with Euroblock
to 3.5-mm jack audio cable, HDMI to HDMI, LAN
cable, and power cable
DISPLAY
MX700:
• Two 55 inch TFT-LCD monitors, edge LED backlight
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080 (16:9)
• Contrast ratio: Typical 4000:1
• Viewing angle: ±178°
• Response time: Typical 8 ms
• Brightness: Typical 350 cd/m2
MX800 Single:
• One 70 inch TFT-LCD monitor, edge LED backlight
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080 (16:9)
• Contrast ratio: Typical 4000:1
• Viewing angle: ± 176°
• Response time: Typical 8 ms
• Brightness: 350 cd/m2
MX700 with dual camera:
• 11 loudspeakers in total
• 9 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 2 balanced dual driver folded bass horns (one
behind each screen)
• 400 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 65-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 55-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
Contrast ratio: Typical 4000:1
Viewing angle: ± 176°
Response time: Typical 8 ms
Brightness: 350 cd/m2
MX800 Single with single camera:
• 7 loudspeakers in total
• 6 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 1 balanced quad driver folded bass horn
(2.2 meter long)
• 200 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 47-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 38-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
CAMERA OVERVIEW
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20x total zoom (10x optical,2x digital zoom)
Motorized +12.7°/-14.5° tilt, +58°/-90° pan
80° horizontal field of view
48.8° vertical field of view
F 1.5
Resolutions: 1080p60 and 720p60
Automatic or manual focus, brightness, and white
balance
• Far-end camera control
• Camera control over Ethernet
• Focus distance 3.28 ft (1 m) to infinity
MX800 Single with dual camera:
• 6 loudspeakers in total
• 5 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 1 balanced quad driver folded bass horn
(2.2 meters long)
• 200 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 47-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 38-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
AUDIO SYSTEM
Integrated multichannel loudspeaker system
MX700 with single camera:
• 12 loudspeakers in total
• 10 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 2 balanced dual driver folded bass horns (one
behind each screen)
• 400 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 65-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 55-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
MX800 Dual:
• 13 loudspeakers in total
• 11 closed box full range loudspeakers
• 2 balanced quad driver folded bass horn
(2.2 meters long)
• 400 W amplifier system
• Individual digital processing for each speaker
• Frequency response 47-18000 Hz ±3 dB
• Frequency response 38-20000 Hz ±10 dB
• Max continuous sound pressure 100 dB @ 1 m
MX800 Dual:
• Two 70 inch TFT-LCD monitor, edge LED backlight
• Resolution: 1920 × 1080 (16:9)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
251
USER INTERFACE
Cisco Touch 10 interface
• 10 inch projected capacitive touch screen
• Resolution: 1280 x 800
LANGUAGE SUPPORT
(depends on software version)
• Arabic, Catalan, Chinese-Simplified, ChineseTraditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, EnglishUK, Finnish, French, French-Canadian, German,
Hebrew, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean,
Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, PortugueseBrazilian, Russian, Spanish, Spanish-Latin, Swedish,
Turkish
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
• Support for the Cisco TelePresence Management
Suite (TMS)
• Total management via embedded Telnet, SSH, XML
and SOAP
• Remote software upload via web server, SCP, HTTP
and HTTPS
• One RS-232 for local control and diagnostics
• Support for Cisco Touch 10
DIRECTORY SERVICES
• Support for local directories (Favorites / Local
contacts)
• Corporate directory (through CUCM and Cisco
TMS)
• Server directory supporting LDAP and H.350
(requires Cisco TMS)
• Call history with received, placed and missed calls
with date and time
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 2 of 4)
POWER
PRODUCT DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
MX700:
• Auto-sensing power supply
• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Standby power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 129 W/140 W
• Average power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 547 W/560 W (under normal operating
conditions as defined in IEC 60950-1)
• Maximum power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 567 W/580 W
MX700, free standing floor stand:
• Height: 64.2 in. (163.1 cm)
• Width: 99.1 in. (251.7 cm)
• Depth: 36.2 in. (92.0 cm) including feet
• Weight, single camera: 339.5 lbs (154 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 348.3 lbs (158 kg)
MX800 Single:
• Auto-sensing power supply
• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Standby power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 106 W/118 W
• Average power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 320 W/333 W (under normal operating
conditions as defined in IEC 60950-1)
• Max power consumption single camera/dual
camera: 330 W/343 W
MX800 Dual:
• Auto-sensing power supply
• 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
• Standby power consumption dual camera: 157 W
• Average power consumption dual camera: 570 W
(under normal operating conditions as defined in
IEC 60950-1)
• Max power consumption dual camera: 590 W
OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY:
• Ambient temperature: 32°F to 104°F
(0°C to 40°C)
• Relative humidity (RH): 10% to 90%
STORAGE AND TRANSPORT TEMPERATURE:
• –4°F to 140°F (–20°C to 60°C) at RH 10% to 90%
(non-condensing)
MX700, floor stand secured to the wall:
• Height: 64.2 in. (163.1 cm)
• Width: 99.1 in. (251.7 cm)
• Depth: 6.2 in. or 8.5 in. (15.6 cm or 21.5 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 339.5 lbs (154 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 348.3 lbs (158 kg)
MX700, wall mount:
• Height: 42.2 in. (107.1 cm)
• Width: 99.1 in. (251.7 cm)
• Depth: 5.8 in. (14.8 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 357.1 lbs (162 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 366.0 lbs (166 kg)
MX800 Single, free standing floor stand:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 62.8 in. (159.6 cm)
• Depth: 36.2 in. (92.0 cm) including feet
• Weight, single camera: 244.7 lbs (111 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 253.5 lbs (115 kg)
MX800 Single, floor stand secured to the wall:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 62.8 in. (159.6 cm)
• Depth: 6.2 in. or 8.5 in. (15.6 cm or 21.5 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 240.3 lbs (109 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 249.1 lbs (113 kg)
MX800 Single, wall mount:
• Height: 49.52 in. (125.8 cm)
• Width: 62.8 in. (159.6 cm)
• Depth: 5.8 in. (14.8 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 240.3 lbs (109 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 249.1 lbs (113 kg)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
MX800 Dual, free standing floor stand:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 124.8 in. (316.9 cm)
• Depth: 36.2 in. (92.0 cm) including feet
• Weight: 524.7 lbs (238 kg)
MX800 Dual, floor stand secured to the wall:
• Height: 71.6 in. (181.8 cm)
• Width: 124.8 in. (316.9 cm)
• Depth: 6.2 in. or 8.5 in. (15.6 cm or 21.5 cm)
• Weight: 524.7 lbs (238 kg)
MX800 Dual, wall mount:
• Height: 49.5 in. (125.8 cm)
• Width: 124.8 in. (316.9 cm)
• Depth: 5.8 in. (14.8 cm)
• Weight: 537.9 lbs (244 kg)
APPROVALS AND COMPLIANCE
•
•
•
•
Directive 2014/35/EU (Low-Voltage Directive)
Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Directive) – Class A
Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS)
Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)
• NRTL approved (Product Safety)
• FCC CFR 47 Part 15B (EMC) – Class A
Please check the Product Approval Status Database
at http://www.ciscofax.com for approval documents
per country.
PACKAGING DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
MX700:
• Height: 62.2 in. (158.0 cm)
• Depth: 30.5 in. (77.5 cm)
• Width: 61.7 in. (156.7 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 498.2 lbs (226 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 511.5 lbs (232 kg)
MX800 Single:
• Height: 59.1 in. (150.0 cm)
• Depth: 26.4 in. (67.0 cm)
• Width: 72.8 in. (185.0 cm)
• Weight, single camera: 361.6 lbs (164 kg)
• Weight, dual camera: 374.8 lbs (170 kg)
MX800 Dual:
• Height: 59.1 in. (150.0 cm)
• Depth: 34.6 in. (88.0 cm)
• Width: 72.8 in. (185.0 cm)
• Weight: 705.5 lbs (320 kg)
252
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 3 of 4)
PRODUCT CAPABILITIES
PRODUCT DELIVERED COMPLETE WITH:
• One mounting option, single or dual camera option,
Cisco Touch 10, codec, complete audio system,
2 × Cisco Microphone 60, two presentation cables.
BANDWIDTH
• H.323 and SIP up to 6 Mbps point-to-point
• Up to 6 Mpbs total MultiSite bandwidth
MINIMUM BANDWIDTH FOR RESOLUTION / FRAME
RATE (H.264)
•
•
•
•
720p30 from 768 kbps
720p60 from 1152 kbps
1080p30 from 1472 kbps
1080p60 from 2560 kbps
FIREWALL TRAVERSAL
• Cisco TelePresence Expressway technology
• H.460.18 and H.460.19 firewall traversal
• SIP ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment)
VIDEO STANDARDS
• H.261, H.263, H.263+, H.264
• H.265 (SIP)
VIDEO FEATURES
• Advanced screen layouts
• Local auto layout
VIDEO INPUTS (FIVE INPUTS)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
HDCP is not supported
Three HDMI inputs*; support formats up to maximum
1920 × 1080@60 fps, including:
• 1920 × 1080@60 and 59.94 Hz (1080p60)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
• 1920 × 1080@30 and 29.97 Hz (1080p30)
• 1920 × 1080@25 Hz (1080p25)
• 1920 × 1080@24, and 23.97 Hz (1080p24)
• 1280 × 720@60, and 59.94 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
• 720 × 480@60, and 59.94 Hz (480p60)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
640 × 480@60 Hz (480p60)
1280 × 1024@60, and 75 Hz (SXGA)
1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, and 85 Hz (XGA)
800 × 600@56, 60, 72, 75, and 85 Hz (SVGA)
1920 × 1200@50 and 60 Hz (WUXGA)
1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
One DVI-I input
Analog (VGA or YPbPr); support formats up
to maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps (1080p60),
including:
• 1920 × 1080@60 Hz (1080p)
• 1280 × 720@60 Hz (720p)
• 1280 × 1024@60 and 75 Hz (SXGA)
• 1280 × 960@60 Hz
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, and 85 Hz (XGA)
• 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
• 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
• 1280 × 800@60 Hz (WXGA)
• 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
Digital (DVI-D); support formats up to maximum
1920 × 1080@60 fps, including:
• 1920 × 1080@60, 59.94 Hz (1080p60)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
• 1920 × 1080@30, 29.97 Hz (1080p30)
• 1920 × 1080@25 Hz (1080p25)
• 1920 × 1080@24, 23.97 Hz (1080p24)
• 1280 × 720@60, 59.94 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
• 720 × 480@60, 59.94 Hz (480p60)
• 640 × 480@60 Hz (480p60)
• 1280 × 1024@60, 75 Hz (SXGA)
• 1024 × 768@60, 70, 75, 85 Hz (XGA)
• 800 × 600@56, 60, 72, 75, 85 Hz (SVGA)
• 1680 × 1050@60 Hz (WSXGA+)
• 1440 × 900@60 Hz (WXGA+)
• 1280 × 768@60 Hz (WXGA)
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
One Composite/S-Video Input (BNC Connectors)
• PAL/NTSC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Systems with single camera: HDMI input 1 is used for
the camera
Systems with dual camera: HDMI inputs 1 and 2 are
used for the cameras
VIDEO OUTPUTS (THREE OUTPUTS)
Two HDMI outputs* and one DVI-I output; supports
formats up to maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps
(1080p60), including:
• 1920 × 1080@60 Hz (1080p60)
• 1920 × 1080@50 Hz (1080p50)
• 1280 × 720@60 Hz (720p60)
• 1280 × 720@50 Hz (720p50)
AUDIO STANDARDS
• 64 kbps and 128 kbps AAC-LD, G.722, G.722.1,
G.711, G.729AB
AUDIO FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
MX700 and MX800 Dual: HDMI outputs 1 and 2 are
used for the two integrated screens
MX800 Single: HDMI output 1 is used for the
integrated screen
VESA Monitor Power Management
• Eight microphones, 48 V phantom powered,
Euroblock connector, each with separate echo
cancellers and noise reduction; all microphones can
be set for balanced line level
• Four balanced line level inputs, Euroblock connector
• Three HDMI inputs, digital, stereo (from PC/DVD)
ENCODE/DECODE VIDEO FORMATS
253
High quality 20 kHz audio
Eight separate acoustic echo cancellers
Eight-port audio mixer
Automatic gain control (AGC)
Automatic noise reduction
Active lip synchronization
AUDIO INPUTS (FIFTEEN INPUTS)
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID)
Supports encode/decode video formats up to
maximum 1920 × 1080@60 fps (HD1080p60),
including:
• 176 × 144@30 frames per second (fps) (QCIF)
• 352 × 288@30 fps (CIF)
• 512 × 288@30 fps (w288p)
• 576 × 448@30 fps (448p)
• 768 × 448@30 fps (w448p)
• 704 × 576@30 fps (4CIF)
• 1024 × 576@30 fps (w576p)
• 1280 × 720@30 fps (720p30)
• 1920 × 1080@30 fps (1080p30)
• 640 × 480@30 fps (VGA)
• 800 × 600@30 fps (SVGA)
• 1024 × 768@30 fps (XGA)
• 1280 × 1024@30 fps (SXGA)
• 1280 × 768@30 fps (WXGA)
1440 × 900@30 fps (WXGA+)
1680 × 1050@30 fps (WSXGA+)
512 × 288@60 fps (w288p60)
768 × 448@60 fps (w448p60)
1024 × 576@60 fps (w576p60)
1280 × 720@60 fps (720p60)
1920 × 1080@60 fps (1080p60)
AUDIO OUTPUTS (EIGHT OUTPUTS)
• Six balanced line level outputs, Euroblock connector
• Two HDMI outputs (MX700 and MX800 Dual: Both
HDMI audio outputs are used for the two integrated
screens. MX800 Single: One HDMI audio output is
used for the integrated screen)
DUAL STREAM
• H.239 dual stream (H.323)
• BFCP dual stream (SIP)
• Support for resolutions up to 1920 × 1200 at 30 fps,
independent of main stream resolution
*
HDMI version 1.4
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Technical specification (page 4 of 4)
MULTIPOINT SUPPORT
• Five-way embedded SIP/H.323 MultiPoint, ref.
MultiSite
• Cisco Ad-Hoc Conferencing (requires Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM), and Cisco
Meeting Server (CMS) or Cisco TelePresence
Server with Cisco TelePresence Conductor)
• Cisco Conferencing Active Control
MULTISITE FEATURES
(EMBEDDED MULTIPOINT)
• Five-way 720p30, three-way and four-way
1080p30
• Full individual audio and video transcoding
• Individual layouts in MultiSite continuous presence
• H.323/SIP/VoIP in the same conference
• Support for Presentation (H.239/BFCP) from any
participant at resolutions up to 1080p15
• H.264, encryption and dual stream from any site
• IP downspeeding
• Dial in and dial out
• Conference rates up to 10 Mbps
PROTOCOLS
• H.323 and SIP (dual call stack support)
• ISDN (requires Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link)
IP NETWORK FEATURES
• DNS lookup for service configuration
• Differentiated services (QoS)
• IP adaptive bandwidth management (including flow
control)
• Auto gatekeeper discovery
• Dynamic playout and lip-sync buffering
• H.245 DTMF tones in H.323
• RFC 4733 DTMF tones in SIP
• Date and time support via NTP
• Packet loss based downspeeding
• URI dialing
• TCP/IP
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
• IEEE 802.1x network authentication
• IEEE 802.1q VLAN
• IEEE 802.1p QoS and class of service
• ClearPath
IPV6 NETWORK SUPPORT
• Dual-stack IPv4 and IPv6 for DHCP, SSH, HTTP,
HTTPS, DNS and DiffServ
• Support for static IP address assignment, stateless
autoconfiguration and DHCPv6
CISCO UNIFIED COMMUNICATIONS MANAGER
(requires Cisco UCM version 8.6 or later)
• Native registration with Cisco Unified
Communications Manager (CUCM)
• Basic CUCM provisioning
• Firmware upgrade from CUCM
• Cisco Discovery Protocol and DHCP option 150
support
• Basic telephony features such as hold, resume,
transfer, and corporate directory lookup
SECURITY FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Management using HTTPS and SSH
IP administration password
Administration menu password
Disable IP services
Network settings protection
NETWORK INTERFACES
• One LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100/1000 Mbps
• Two LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) interfaces to be used for
Cisco TelePresence peripherals
OTHER INTERFACES
• Two USB host (one is in use; one is for future use)
• GPIO
EMBEDDED ENCRYPTION
• H.323 and SIP point-to-point and MultiSite
• Standards-based: H.235 v3 and Advanced
Encryption Standard (AES)
• Automatic key generation and exchange
• Supported in dual stream
All specifications are subject to change without notice, system specifics may vary.
All images in these materials are for representational purposes only, actual products may differ.
Cisco and the Cisco Logo are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other
countries. A listing of Cisco’s trademarks can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third party trademarks
mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership
relationship between Cisco and any other company.
April 2018
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
254
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
Supported RFCs
The RFC (Request for Comments) series contains technical
and organizational documents about the Internet, including
the technical specifications and policy documents produced
by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
CE software supports a range of RFCs, including the following:
•
RFC 2782 DNS RR for specifying the location of services
(DNS SRV)
•
RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
•
RFC 3263 Locating SIP Servers
•
RFC 3361 DHCP Option for SIP Servers
•
RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time
Applications
•
RFC 3711 The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
•
RFC 4091 The Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT)
Semantics for the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Grouping Framework
•
RFC 4092 Usage of the Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Alternative Network Address Types (ANAT) Semantics in the
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
•
RFC 4582 The Binary Floor Control Protocol
draft-ietf-bfcpbis-rfc4582bis-00 Revision of the Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP) for use over an unreliable transport
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
•
RFC 4733 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones and
Telephony Signals
•
RFC 5245 Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE): A
Protocol for Network Address Translator (NAT) Traversal for
Offer/Answer Protocols
•
RFC 5589: SIP Call Control Transfer
•
RFC 5766 Traversal Using Relays around NAT (TURN): Relay
Extensions to Session Traversal Utilities for NAT (STUN)
•
RFC 5905 Network Time Protocol Version 4: Protocol and
Algorithms Specification
255
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Administrator Guide
Configuration
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Appendices
User documentation on the Cisco web site
Use the following short-links to find the documentation for
the product series running CE software.
The documents are organized in the following categories - some documents are not available for all products:
Install and Upgrade > Install and Upgrade Guides
Room Series:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/room-docs
MX Series:
•
Installation guides: How to install the product
•
Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to
get the system up and running
•
RCSI guide: Regulatory compliance and safety
information
► https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
Maintain and Operate > Maintain and Operate Guides
SX Series:
► https://www.cisco.com/go/sx-docs
DX Series:
•
Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to
get the system up and running
•
Administrator guide: Information required to administer
your product
•
Deployment guide for TelePresence endpoints on
CUCM: Tasks to perform to start using the video system
with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager
(CUCM)
► https://www.cisco.com/go/dx-docs
In general, you can find user documentation for all Cisco
Collaboration endpoints at ► https://www.cisco.com/go/
telepresence/docs
•
Spare parts overview, Spare parts replacement guides,
Cable schemas: Useful information when replacing
spare parts
Maintain and Operate > End-User Guides
•
User guides: How to use the product
•
Quick reference guides: How to use the product
•
Physical interface guide: Details about the codec’s
physical interface, including the connector panel and
LEDs
Reference Guides > Command references
•
Reference Guides > Technical References
•
256
CAD drawings: 2D CAD drawings with measurements
Configure > Configuration Guides
•
Customization guide: How to customize the user
interface, how to use the video system’s API to program
in-room controls, making macros, use a video switch,
and configure advanced audio set-ups using the Audio
Console.
Design > Design Guides
•
Video conferencing room guidelines: General guidelines
for room design and best practice
•
Video conferencing room guidelines: Things to do to
improve the perceived audio quality
Software Downloads, Release and General Information >
Licensing Information
•
Open source documentation: Licenses and notices for
open source software used in this product
Software Downloads, Release and General Information >
Release Notes
•
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
API reference guides: Reference guide for the
Application Programmer Interface (API)
Software release notes
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco TelePresence MX700 and MX800

Introduction
Configuration
Administrator Guide
Peripherals
Maintenance
System settings
Appendices
Intellectual property rights
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS
MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,
INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE
ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION
OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING
PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH
THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU
ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,
CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a
program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s
public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright
© 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT
FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH
ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR
TRADE PRACTICE.
Cisco contacts
On our web site you will find an overview of the worldwide Cisco contacts.
Go to: ► https://www.cisco.com/go/offices
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS
SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document
are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples,
command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included
in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual
IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and
coincidental.
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Dr.
San Jose, CA 95134 USA
All printed copies and duplicate soft copies are considered un-Controlled copies
and the original on-line version should be referred to for latest version.
Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax
numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/
or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks,
go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Third-party trademarks mentioned
are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not
imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
Cisco product security overview
This product contains cryptographic features and is subject to United States and
local country laws governing import, export, transfer, and use. Delivery of Cisco
cryptographic products does not imply third-party authority to import, export,
distribute, or use encryption. Importers, exporters, distributors, and users are
responsible for compliance with U.S. and local country laws. By using this product
you agree to comply with applicable laws and regulations. If you are unable to
comply with U.S. and local laws, return this product immediately.
Further information regarding U.S. export regulations may be found at
http://www.bis.doc.gov/policiesandregulations/ear/index.htm.
D15331.15 MX700 and MX800 Administrator Guide CE9.7, APRIL 2019.
257
www.cisco.com — Copyright © 2019 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project